TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
...............................79
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
......................................... 187
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
.................................................269
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
...............................................365
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................................381
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................443
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
..........................................451
10
INDEX
....................................................................461
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance, and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused to go out of
control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this
vehicle is out of control it may rollover when some other
vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
4 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
Rollover Warning Label
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehcile registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
1
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys ..................12
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................12
▫ Locking Doors With The Key ..............13
m Sentry Key ............................13
▫ Replacement Keys ......................15
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............15
▫ General Information ....................16
m Ignition And Steering Lock .................17
▫ Ignition Accessory Delay Feature ...........18
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped .........18
▫ To Set The Alarm ......................19
▫ To Disarm The System ...................19
m Illuminated Entry ........................20
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks ....20
m Remote Keyless Entry .....................20
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........21
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............22
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................24
2
▫ General Information ....................24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ........25
▫ Battery Replacement ....................26
m Remote Starting System — If Equipped ........27
m Door Locks ............................28
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................28
▫ Power Door Locks .....................29
▫ Child Protection Door Lock ...............32
m Windows .............................33
▫ Power Windows .......................33
▫ Auto Down ..........................34
▫ Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
(Driver’s And Front Passenger Door Only) ....34
▫ Window Lockout Switch .................35
m Liftgate ...............................35
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............36
m Occupant Restraints ......................39
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................40
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ....45
▫ Second Row Center Seat Belt ..............46
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped ............................46
▫ Rear 60/40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point
Belt — If Equipped .....................47
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................50
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) ...........................50
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............52
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................52
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags ...........53
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............62
▫ Child Restraint ........................64
m Engine Break-In Recommendations ...........74
m Safety Tips ............................75
▫ Exhaust System .......................75
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................76
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle ..............................77
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, and remove the key.
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
Ignition Key
Ignition Switch Positions
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with some after-market remote starting systems. Use
of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob-
lems and loss of security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder-equipped components on the
same key chain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit PIN number. Keep the PIN in a secure
location. This number is required for dealer replacement
of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro-
gramming procedure. This procedure consists of pro-
gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one, which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2.
Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position for at least 3 seconds,
but no longer than 15-seconds. Then, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the first key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 15
seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete,
the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry
Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro-
cedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK
In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems
are locked to provide anti-theft protection for your ve-
hicle. It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK
position when starting your vehicle, if the steering wheel
is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. The key can be
inserted or withdrawn only in the LOCK position. Push
in on the key in the ignition lock cylinder to rotate to the
LOCK position.
Ignition Switch Positions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
WARNING!
The key cannot be turned to LOCK until the selector
is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull the
shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK
position.
NOTE: The steering wheel will lock when the key is
removed, and the steering wheel is turned around 115
degrees clockwise or 65 degrees counterclockwise from
the center position.
Ignition Accessory Delay Feature
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC),the power window switches,
radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power out-
lets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), the power window switches,
radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power out-
lets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. For details, refer to “KEY OFF POWER
DELAY > OFF” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors, liftgate, and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is
activated, the system provides both audible and visual
signals. The horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes
and the headlights and security light in the instrument
cluster will flash for an additional 15 minutes. The engine
will not run until the system is disarmed.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Set the Alarm:
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or
use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
all the doors are locked and closed the security light in
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
NOTE: If the security light stays on continuously during
vehicle operation, have the system checked by your
dealer.
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the doors. If
something has triggered the system in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
The security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down.
After six unsuccessul attempts at starting the engine, the
system will shut down until the correct key is used. To
exit alarming mode, press the RKE Unlock button or start
the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key.
The security alarm system is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit.
NOTE: You may accidentally activate the security sys-
tem (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the vehicle
without using the key fob to unlock the door(s). The
security system can be disarmed with the key fob’s
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry
Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON
position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the key fob.
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob
LOCK button is pressed.
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
NOTE: For the remote starting feature (if equipped),
refer to the “Remote Starting System” section.
NOTE: For the power liftgate feature (if equipped), refer
to the “Power Liftgate” section.
Five Button Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your vehicle’s keyfob may have three, four or
five buttons (shown), depending on the optional features
purchased with your vehicle.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
minimum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the SecurityAlarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To lock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock
all doors and liftgate. If the ignition is OFF, when the
doors are locked, the parking lights will flash on once
and the horn will chirp once.
Horn Chirp Programming
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob.
2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also
press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the ve-
hicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with
the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while
you are inside the vehicle, will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the SecurityAlarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
6. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Flash Lamps with Lock Programming
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the OFF position, and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Using the Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During the Panic
Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems
will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the
security system on vehicles so equipped.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
two key fob transmitters programmed only for that
vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all
other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have
to reprogram them for your vehicle.
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
heard.
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
9. A single chime will be heard.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the fob.
11. A single chime will be heard.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional fobs.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
1.
If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat
blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart. Make
sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol. Avoid touching the new battery
Transmitter Battery Replacement
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deteriora-
tion. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test transmitter operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system, which will allow the vehicle to be started from
distances up to approximately 300 feet away from the
vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is
part of your ignition key.
In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, liftgate,
and all the doors must be closed.
To remote start your vehicle, press the REMOTE START
button on the key fob twice within three seconds. To
indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly.
Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15
minutes. To cancel remote start, press the REMOTE
START button once.
Remote Start Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the key fob. After the vehicle is
unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle, insert
the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position,
otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto-
matically turn off.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•
If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
•
Any engine warning lamps come on
•
The hood is opened
•
The hazard switch is pressed
•
The transmission is moved out of park
•
Pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated
but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After
either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is
alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle
must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition
and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All the doors can be “manually” locked from the inside
by pushing down the door lock plunger, located at the
rear of the door. Both front doors may be opened from the
inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked
position.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
Power Door Lock Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Automatic Door Lock Programming
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3
of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and Close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position a minimum of four times;
ending in the LOCK position. (do not start the engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To re-activate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened (excluding the liftgate). This will
occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the Park
position after the vehicle has been driven (shifted out of
Park and all doors closed).
This feature will not operate if there is any manual
operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock).
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming — If Equipped
Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable
the Auto Unlock Feature:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3
of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chimes that may be confusing during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position a minimum of four times
ending in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
this feature.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
the above procedure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-
protection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and slide the
control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage
the child-protection locks. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child Lock
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger tip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate only when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.
This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow
the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the
ignition it turned OFF.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Auto Down
The driver’s and front passenger window switch has an
Auto Down feature. Push the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. To cancel the Auto Down movement,
operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection
(Driver’s and Front Passenger Door Only)
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure it will reverse direction and then stop.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condi-
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during auto closure. If this happens pull the switch
lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting the Auto-Up Feature
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
Pull the window switch up and close the window com-
pletely, then pull and hold the switch for 1 second.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless
entry transmitter or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
NOTE: When the engine is running from a Remote Start
(if equipped), the vehicle must first be unlocked by
pressing the remote transmitter UNLOCK button prior to
activating the Power Liftgate otherwise the engine will
stop automatically.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, pull the exterior handle and open the
liftgate with one fluid motion.
The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in
gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
NOTE: If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with
a powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becom-
ing unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually
access the liftgate area. The liftgate will re-lock automati-
cally within 10 seconds once the liftgate is closed.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
Power Liftgate Button
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the remote keyless entry transmitter button is
pressed two times and the “Lamp Flash” feature is
enabled the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing.
The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the
switch located on the overhead console.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the
liftgate starts to open or close.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
Power Liftgate Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
•
The power liftgate must be in the full open position in
order to power close. If the liftgate is not fully open,
press the remote keyless entry transmitter or overhead
console button to fully open the liftgate and then press
again to close.
•
If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
•
If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
•
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below 222°F(230° C) or temperatures above 150° F
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
•
If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, knee
bolsters, front airbags for both the driver and front
passenger, and left and right side curtain airbags for the
driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you
will be carrying children too small for adult-size seat
belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature (refer to the
Child Restraint section in this manual), can be used to
hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a colli-
sion, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out Belt and Latchplate
Removing Slack From Belt
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on
your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If the front airbags are deployed the front
pretensioning retractors must be replaced.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position
the belt away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage
release button to release the anchorage, and then move it
up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in the desired position. Pull the seatback
forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position.
WARNING!
A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the
upright position will not protect you properly.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
Second Row Center Seat Belt
The center seating position in the second row has a seat
belt assembly that can be converted from the normal
emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode.
The seat belt should only be used in the automatic
locking mode when a child seat is installed at this seating
location.
When sitting in this seating location, ensure the seatback
is fully engaged with the seatback latch by pushing
rearward on the center seatback until you hear a click
that signals latch engagement.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Rear 60/40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point
Belt — If Equipped
The center three point seat belt for the third row rear seat
may be disconnected to allow the 60% seat back to easily
fold down. The keyed-buckle latch plate (small latch
plate at the end of the belt) can be detached from the
keyed seat belt buckle (buckle without a red release
button) located on the left inboard side of the third row
bench seat. Insert the ignition key into the center white
slot on the keyed buckle. The small latchplate can be
removed when the key is pressed into the buckle. Allow
the retractor to take up the surplus webbing, and insert
the latch plates into the slots in the headliner for storage
while the 60% seat back is folded down.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
WARNING!
•
If the small (keyed buckle) latch plate and keyed
buckle are not properly connected when the seat
belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not
be able to provide the proper restraint and will
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
•
When reattaching the small (keyed buckle) latch
plate and keyed buckle, ensure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceeding procedure to detach the
small latch plate from the keyed buckle, untwist
the webbing, and reattach the small latch plate and
keyed buckle.
Third Row Center Seat Belt
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To reattach the seat belt to the third row center seat, pull
the small (keyed buckle) latch plate forward from the
headliner slots and insert it into the keyed buckle until
there is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for
the proper seat belt usage.
Third Row Center Seat Belt
Headliner Stowage Slots
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once the warning is triggered it can be paused if the
vehicle speed drops below 5 mph (8 km/h. The warning
will be restarted if the vehicle speed becomes greater
than 5 mph.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver seat belt. DO NOT start the engine or
press the trip reset button.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the seat belt Warning Light to turn off. If during this
time, the seat belt becomes unbuckled or the engine is
cranked or started, programming will be cancelled.
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver seat belt three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled. A chime will sound immediately (once the
feature has toggled). If during this time the ignition
switch is turned out of the ON position or the timer
expires, programming mode will be cancelled.
4. Programming mode will be cancelled after the feature
has toggled with the seat belt still buckled or if the
ignition switch is turned to the lock position or 10
seconds after the feature has toggled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle is also equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. The window bags are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are no longer functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
• Your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the location of the window bag. The area
where the window bag is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. Window
bags will also deploy on roll over events. But even in
collisions where the airbags work, you need the seat belts
to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect
you properly.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against
the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully into
the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the 9If
You Need Customer Assistance9 section later in this
owner’s manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Window Bags above Side Windows
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How the Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will
detect a roll over when equipped with side airbags.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light in the instrument cluster for 6 to 8 seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first turned
on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning
light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity. The steer-
ing wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way
as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags fully
inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds. This is about half
of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. The
passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags
do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
•
The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions or in a roll over
event. When the ORC (with side impact option) de-
tects a collision or roll over requiring the window bags
to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. Both Window Bags will inflate in a roll over
event. Aquantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the window bag. The inflating window bag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the window bag inflates.
This especially applies to children. The window bag is
only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm) thick when it is
inflated.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: At no time should any supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically, the engine
will shut off and the hazard lights will turn on. In
addition, approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has
stopped moving, the interior lights will light until the
ignition switch is turned off.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
EDR will be activated on Front, Side and roll over events.
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to 5-seconds of specific vehicle data parameters
(see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to
the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment,
and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration
data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data
are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
tion to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
•
9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seatbelt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire pressure monitoring system status (if equipped)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time - babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12
years and under should ride properly buckled up in a
rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child:
Infants and Small Children
•
This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System section.)
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child Seat
Anchorage System Section.)
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The second row outside seating positions and all third
row seats have cinching latch plates. The second row
center position has an automatic locking retractor.
These are designed to keep the lap portion tight
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. If the seat
belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will have a
distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough to allow you to pass through the child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor.
Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the
excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the
child restraint. Refer to 9Automatic Locking Mode9
earlier in this section.
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s second row seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are
now available. However, because the lower anchorages
are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint
systems having attachments for those anchorages will
continue to also have features for installation using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps
and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages
have been available for some time. For some older child
restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer
add-on tether strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to
take advantage of all the available attachments provided
with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three second row seating positions have lower an-
chorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted
lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attach-
ments must be installed in the outboard positions only.
Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,
NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that
two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are
installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent
rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you
must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Please refer to the next section for typical installa-
tion instructions.
Second Row Seat Left Side
Second Row Seat Right Side
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear
seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, and are
just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat
cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap
anchorages behind each second row seating position
located on the back of the seat. Many, but not all restraint
systems will be equipped with separate straps on each
side, with each having a hook or connector for attach-
ment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting
the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints
and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the
tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the
tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on
the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages. Next attach the lower hooks or connectors
over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat
cover material. Then attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age located on the back of the seat, being careful to route
the tether strap to provide the most direct path between
the anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint and, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The second and third row seats have either cinching latch
plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed
to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so
that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If the seat belt
has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the shoulder
portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The
cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any
seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. If the seat belt
has a automatic locking retractor, it will have a distinctive
label. Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough
to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it
is all extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to 9Auto-
matic Locking Mode9 earlier in this section.
Child Restraints in Third Row Seating (If
Equipped)
For vehicles equipped with third row split bench (60/40)
seating, the tether strap anchorage is located on the seat
Second Row Seat Tether Anchors
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
back behind the center seating position. The hooks in the
rear floor are NOT designed to withstand the forces that
may occur during a crash.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap. Children and infants are safer when properly
restrained in a child restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
There are tether strap anchorages behind each seating
position in the second row and behind the center seating
position in the case of the third row seat (60/40) split
bench, if equipped. To install child restraint tether follow
these instructions.
1. Place the child restraint in the center seating position
of the third row of seats.
Third Row Seat Tether Anchor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
2. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two headrest posts.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the tether anchor located on the seat back and remove the
slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instruc-
tions for Child Restraint Tether Anchor in this sec-
tion. See your dealer for help if necessary.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While
cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality, energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust System
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an ex-
tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and
odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the following
precautions should be observed:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
•
It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for more than a short period. If so,
adjust your climate control system to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC.
•
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Heater Defroster Ducts
Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation.
Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts. If
there are any question regarding the operation of your
heater defroster ducts, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any
question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the
belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the
seatbelt light will flash.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
detected the cause should be located and corrected.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Mirrors ...............................83
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror .................83
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ....83
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................84
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped ............................84
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors ............85
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ....86
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............87
▫ Automatic Dimming Driver’s Exterior
Mirror — If Equipped ...................87
m Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
Equipped .............................87
▫ Operation ............................89
▫ Phone Call Features ....................96
▫ UConnect™ System Features ..............99
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............104
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System ....................105
3
▫ General Information ...................114
m Seats ................................114
▫ Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment ........114
▫ Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners ..........115
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped ...........................116
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating
Positions ...........................116
▫ 8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . 117
▫ 4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If
Equipped ...........................118
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............118
▫ Second Row Bucket Seats — Fold And
Tumble ............................121
▫ Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold And
Tumble ............................123
▫ Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped .......126
▫ Third Row 60/40 Folding — If Equipped ....129
m Driver Memory System — If Equipped .......131
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory .......132
▫ Memory Position Recall .................133
▫ To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory . .134
▫ Self-Limiting Control ...................134
▫ Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control ....135
m To Open And Close The Hood .............135
m Lights ...............................137
▫ Interior Lights .......................138
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Battery Saver ........................139
▫ Headlight Delay ......................139
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......140
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights .....140
▫ Illuminated Entry .....................140
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) .....141
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................141
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............141
▫ Multifunction Control Lever ..............142
m Windshield Wipers And Washers ............144
▫ Windshield Wipers ....................144
▫ Windshield Washers ...................146
m Tilt Steering Column ....................147
m Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ......148
▫ Adjustment .........................148
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ......149
▫ To Activate ..........................149
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed ...............150
▫ To Deactivate ........................150
▫ To Resume Speed .....................150
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............151
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............152
m Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped .......152
m Rear Camera — If Equipped ...............156
m Overhead Console ......................158
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ................158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
3
m Overhead Console With Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped .....159
▫ Dome/Reading Lights ..................159
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped ..................159
▫ Compass/Temperature Button ............166
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped .........168
▫ Programming HomeLinkt ...............169
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .....171
▫ Using HomeLinkt .....................172
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkt Button . .172
▫ Security ............................173
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................173
▫ General Information ...................173
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped .............174
▫ Express Open Feature ..................175
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................176
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................176
m Electrical Power Outlets ..................177
▫ 115V Inverter Outlet – If Equipped .........177
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
(Battery Fed Configuration) ..............179
m Floor Console .........................181
▫ Floor Console Features .................181
▫ Rear Floor Console Features – If Equipped . . .182
m Factory Installed Roof Luggage Rack .........183
m Cargo Management System—If Equipped ......185
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window. A two-point pivot system
allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the
mirror.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of truck). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-
light glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
mirror. A light in the button will indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. This option also controls
the driver side mirror when it is equipped with auto
dimming glass.
Day/Night Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Power Mirror Control
Mirror Directions
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Lighted Vanity Mirror
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you
depress the rear window defroster switch located on the
instrument panel. The light will illuminate to indicate
that the heating elements are ON. Turning Off the rear
window defroster or the ignition will deactivate the
heated mirrors.
Automatic Dimming Driver’s Exterior Mirror — If
Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying light
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside mirror and can be turned off by pressing the
button at the base of the inside mirror.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER radio contains an inte-
grated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™) sys-
tem. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
UConnect™ system operating instructions for this ra-
dio.
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
version 0.96 or higher. See UConnect™ website for sup-
ported phones.
NOTE: For UConnect™ customer support, visit the
following web sites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phone book enables you to store up to
32 names and four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phone book accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons (Phone
Button and Voice Recognition Button) that will enable
you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
UConnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect™
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt or another
prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following
the beep. The UConnect™ system will play all the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the “Phone” button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the “Phone” button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9 and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. The UCon-
nect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for
pairing.
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9 and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
Connectivity9).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
hicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.9
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone
book. Refer to 9Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,9 to learn how to store a name in the phone
book.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phone book is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook New Entry.9
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or
9Robert9 instead of 9Bob.9
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
9Home,99Work,99Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phone book
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phone book entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phone book with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phone book accessible
only in that language.
Phonebook Download
UConnect™ allows the user to download entries from
their phone via Bluetooth. To use this feature, press the
“Phone” button and say “Phonebook Download.” Sys-
tem prompts “Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue-
tooth…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook
entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone owners’
manual for specific instructions on how to send these
entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans-
fers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to
the UConnect™ and then send the address book entry
via Bluetooth. Please see your phone owners’ manual
for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth
connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it
will be use only the first 24 characters.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phone book is recom-
mended when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phone book
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phone book entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phone book entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Delete.9
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phone book
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phone book
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say 9Delete.9
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phone book entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Erase All.9
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
•
After confirmation, the phone book entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phone book in the current language
is deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phone book entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and say 9Call.9
NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9
operations at this point.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press ’Phone’ button to accept the call. To reject the
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phone book
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to 9Toggling Between Calls.9 To combine two calls,
refer to 9Conference Call.9
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the 8Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
“Phone” button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the “Phone” button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the “Phone” button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under 9Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
established, press and hold the “Phone” button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “Phone”
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the “Phone” button until you hear a single
beep.
Redial
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Redial.9
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect™ system.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32-name phone book
is usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USAand
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Towing Assistance.9
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page refer to 9Working with Automated
Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound3746#,youcanpressthe“Voice Recognition”
button and say 93746#Send.9 Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number, say the name of the phonebook entry
you wish to send. The UConnect™ will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with the phone-
book entry as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations, this is normal.
•
Some paging and voicemail systems have system
timeout settings too short that may not allow the use
of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a{,9 you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say 9Mute.9
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say 9Mute-off.9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the “Voice
Recognition” button and say 9Transfer Call.9
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
•
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately within 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
UConnect™ Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
“Phone” button and say “UConnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UCon-
nect™ system Voice Training feature may be used. To
enter this training mode, follow one of the two proce-
dures:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
From outside the UConnect™ mode (e.g. from radio
mode)
•
Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say 9Setup,
Voice Training9 command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect™ system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rear view mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
inch (1 cm) gap between the
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9
•
Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phone book.
•
UConnect™ phone book nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phone book.
•
You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows, and
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
•
dry weather condition.
•
operation from driver seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts.
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
redial
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
SEATS
Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment
The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjuster
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners
The bucket seats are equipped with recliners. The reclin-
ing mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right
side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the driver
seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the
lever, then push back to the desired position and release
the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback
is locked.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located
on the right side of the driver seat and on the left side of
the passenger’s seat. Moving the lumbar control lever
fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support.
Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating
Positions
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
To lower the head restraint, depress the release button
located at the base of the head restraint and push down
on the head restraint.
Lumbar Support Adjustment Lever
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver power seat switches are located on the left
side of the driver seat lower side trim. The bottom switch
controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjust-
ment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust-
ment.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Power Seat Switch Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
the right side of the passenger seat lower side trim. The
bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
NOTE: The 4 - way seat does not have an up/down
adjustment.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the driver, front passenger and second
row seats. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the instrument panel below the climate con-
trols.
Front Heated Seat Switches
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front heated seat system allows the driver and front
passenger to select from two different levels of supple-
mental electrical seat heating, or no seat heating to suit
their individual comfort requirements.
With the ignition switch in the RUN position, depressing
the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary high or
low position provides power to the heated seat element
and maintains the requested temperature setting. If the
heated seat switch is depressed to a different position
(low or high) than the currently selected state, the re-
quested temperature setting will change to a new selec-
tion. If the heated seat switch is depressed a second time
to the same position as the currently selected state, the
seat heater will turn off.
The controls for the second row heated seats are located
on the center console between the second row seats.
Each heated seat switch has two settings (HI and LOW).
Press the switch once to obtain high heat level, then press
the switch again to obtain low heat level. Pressing the
switch a third time will turn the heated seats off. If you
do not purposefully turn the switch off, the seat heating
level will automatically change to the next lower level, or
Rear Heated Seats Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
off. Both of the indicators on identifies High heat level.
The lower indicator on only, identifies Low heat level.
NOTE: The high heat setting will operate for approxi-
mately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, the system will
automatically transition to the low heat setting. The low
heat setting will operate for 30 minutes, then the system
will turn off.
If the low heat setting is initially selected, the system will
operate for 30 minutes and then turn off.
If the indicator lamp on the heated seat switch does not
light, an indicator blinks when the switch is depressed or
if the heated seats do not operate, the system should be
serviced by a qualified technician.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row Bucket Seats — Fold and Tumble
Second row bucket seats have seatback recliners on both
seating positions. Raising the lever allows the seatback to
be reclined an additional 11 degrees.
The second row bucket seats can be folded and tumbled
forward for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo
area.
To fold and tumble the seat, follow these steps:
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the
seat.
2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward posi-
tion.
3. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and push the seatback forward.
Folding the Seatback
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
4. Pull up on the release handle and lift to tumble the
seat fully forward. If the seat contacts the rear of the front
seat, move the front seat forward.
To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
seatback release lever and pull the seatback up to return
it to its full upright position.
To fold and tumble the 2nd row seats from the 3rd row,
fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the
seatback. Continue lifting the lever to release the floor
latches to tumble the seat.
Tumbling the Seat Forward
Tumble Lever
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold and Tumble
The 40/20/40 seat configuration is standard on all mod-
els. This seat is equipped with a unique fold-and-tumble
feature. The 40% seatbacks have spring loaded hinges
which assist with the folding of the seatbacks.
Second row leather seats have seatback recliners at the
40% seating positions. Raising the lever allows the seat-
back to be reclined an additional 11 degrees.
Fold, Tumble, and Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
To Fold the 40% seatbacks fully raise the lever on the side
of the seat to release the seatback. The seatback can now
be folded into the down position for use as a cargo floor,
or the seat can now be tumbled forward to allow access
to the rear of the vehicle.
To fold the 20% seatback, pull the strap forward to release
the seatback. Fold the seatback down for use as an
armrest or to carry cargo. When returning the seatback to
the upright position, push the seatback rearward to latch
the seatback. Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is
locked in the upright position.
WARNING!
The 20% seatback contains the center shoulder belt.
A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the
upright position will not protect you properly.
Rear 20% Seat Pull Strap
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Tumble the 40% seat, fully raise the lever on the side
of the seat to release the floor latches and tumble the seat.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the outer 40% second
row seats in the tumbled position. The outer 40%
second row seats are only intended to be tumbled for
entry and exit to the third row seat. Failure to follow
these instructions could result in personal injury.
Fold, Tumble, and Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
NOTE: The seatback must be fully folded into the down
position to allow the lever to be raised enough to release
the floor latches.
To Fold and Tumble the 2nd row 40% seats from the 3rd
row, fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the
seatback. Continue raising the lever to release the floor
latches to tumble the seat.
NOTE: The head restraints must be lowered but do not
have to be removed to fold and tumble the seats.
Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped
To Fold The Seats
Folding the third seat occurs in two stages: First the
cushion is lifted and moved forward from the pockets at
the front of the cushion. The cushion will rest onto the
floor directly behind the second row seat. Second, the top
of the back is folded forward and rests onto the cushion.
The back will not fold unless the cushion has been folded
forward first.
Tumble Lever
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Cushion Pockets Seat Cushion Movement Up And Forward
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
CAUTION!
When loading cargo into the rear of you vehicle with
the 3rd row seat folded flat, be careful not to damage
the material on the head restraints.
NOTE: The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the
seat back.
WARNING!
Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion
and back are properly engaged. Proper engagement
can be verified by pushing/pulling on the upright
seatback. The seatback will not move unless properly
engaged.
Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded or tumbled. In a collision, you
could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row 60/40 Folding — If Equipped
Third Row Seat
Third Row Seat 40% Seatback Fold
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
Third Row Seat Features Third Row Seat Folded Forward
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat
position, driver’s outside mirror position, adjustable
brake and accelerator pedals position, Automatic Tem-
perature Control (ATC) temperature and radio station
preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters
can also be programmed to recall the same positions
when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Your vehicle was delivered with two Remote Keyless
Entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be
Third Row Seat Return Pull Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
linked to either memory position. The memory system
can accommodate up to two transmitters, each transmit-
ter linked to either of the two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store new settings.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and both side view
mirrors to the desired positions.
NOTE: Not all motors may be moved at one time.
Please refer to the 8-way power seat description.
2. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
3. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
4. Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
while the ATC is in Auto mode.
5. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door.
6. Within 5 seconds, press and release memory button 1
or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be per-
formed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory po-
sitions.
7. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the
transmitters.
8. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
9. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory posi-
tion using the other numbered memory button or to link
another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory
was inhibited for any reason.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
•
The driver’s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall
memory positions.
•
The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory posi-
tions.
•
Not all motors may be moved at one time. Please refer
to the 8-way power seat description.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter
linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the
Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter
linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or
pressing any one of the power seat buttons, or pressing
the adjustable pedals button, or pressing either the LOCK
or UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry trans-
mitter when not in the ignition switch. When a recall is
cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the pedals stop moving.
Adelay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory
was inhibited for any reason.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
2. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located
on the driver’s door.
3. Within 10 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter.
To disable another transmitter linked to either memory
position, repeat steps 1-3 for each transmitter.
NOTE: The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry
transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from
the factory. The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry
transmitters to memory can be disabled (or later reen-
abled) by a qualified DaimlerChrysler representative. For
vehicles equipped with the Electronic vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC), refer to 9Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features)9 under 9Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) in Section 3 of this manual for
details.
Self-Limiting Control
To improve vehicle reliability, the memory system in-
cludes a self-limiting control for full travel positioning of
power seat and Adjustable Pedal movement (all direc-
tions). This self-limiting control may however develop an
unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is
encountered at sometime during usage. One example of
such an occurrence may include a box or package ob-
structing the full rearward movement of the driver’s seat.
Once the obstruction is removed, the self-limiting control
may be restored to maximum position. The self-limiting
control may be restored by first reaching the recently
limited or obstructed position, then release and reactivate
the same button or buttons. Continued seat travel beyond
the obstructed position will indicate the recently encoun-
tered self-limitation has been cleared.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control
This additional feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of
and into the vehicle. The seat cushion will move rear-
ward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is
removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move
forward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key
is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK
position. Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position. The Easy Exit
and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if
the seat is positioned rearward enough and no benefit
from moving the seat any farther rearward.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For
details, refer to “EASY EXIT SEAT,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Then push the safety latch lever to the left. It is located
between the grille and hood opening right of the center.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
NOTE: Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip
before closing hood to prevent damage to grille.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
Hood Safety Catch
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch Location
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or when the UNLOCK
button is pressed on the key fob. When a door is open
and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control
all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the
interior lights to go out. This allows the doors to stay
open for extended periods of time without discharging
the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
9Parade9 mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day.
Dimmer Control
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for eight
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for 8
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
NOTE: While the engine is running, the system will
deactivate the Fog Lights and Heated seats if a low
battery system voltage is detected.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for 90
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
cycled off while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain
on for 90 seconds. Headlight delay can be cancelled by
either turning the headlight switch ON then OFF or by
turning the ignition ON.
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Headlamp Off Delay”,
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-
tures),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Automatic Headlights can be activated by rotating the
rotary headlight switch to the symbol “A.” The head-
lights will turn on when the engine is running and the
ambient light sensor indicates that the headlights should
be activated. The headlights will turn off if the headlight
switch is rotated to the off position or 90 seconds after the
ignition is turned to OFF.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position
to the right, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are
all turned on. The headlights will turn ON when the
switch is rotated to the second position.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Illuminated Entry
Headlights turn on for 90 seconds, when the Remote
Keyless Entry UNLOCK button is pressed.
The Illuminated Entry time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Illuminated Aprch ”, under
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 3 of this manual.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started. This provides a constant “Lights ON”
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at reduced intensity. If the parking brake is
applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn off. If the
headlights are activated, the Daytime Running Lights
feature will transition to the normal headlight operating
mode.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or courtesy lights are left
On, after the ignition is turned Off, a continuous fast
chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned ON by placing the headlight
rotary control in the parking light, headlight, or Auto
position and pressing the fog light button. The fog lights
will operate only when the parking lights are ON or
when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam. An
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pressed in, when the head-
light switch is rotated to the OFF position, or the high
beam is selected.
Multifunction Control Lever
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails
to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that
the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the
turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a
faster rate.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile
duration, a continuous chime will sound.
Turn Signal Lever
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multi-function control lever once and the turn
signal (left or right) will flash 3 times, and automatically
turn off.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will momentarily allow the high and low
beams to energize at the same time. Within one second
the headlights will switch to high beams.
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
Dimmer Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to
select the desired wiper speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
Windshield Wiper Switch
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
NOTE: Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the
9Park9 position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
Washer Fluid Switch
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, pull rearward on the lever below the
turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly
in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to
the steering wheel and pedals.
Adjustment
1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10
inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the
center of the steering wheel.
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of
the steering column near the parking brake release, up to
move the pedals toward the driver or down to move the
pedals away from the driver.
4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-
tion at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for
the speed for your specific engine). The controls are
mounted on the steering wheel.
To Activate
NOTE: The Vehicle Speed Control System has been
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch
buttons (i.e. SET and CANCEL) are operated simulta-
neously in order to ensure proper operation. The System
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch
ON / OFF button and re-establishing the desired vehicle
SET speed.
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when
the system is on.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
Asoft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control with-
out erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to
the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the
memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the sys-
tem OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific
engine).
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed
increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
increases so that tapping the button three times will
increase speed by three increments.
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times
will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the
table below (refer to the table below for the speed for
your specific engine).
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Functions 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines
Engage Speed 25 mph (40 km/h)
Minimun RESUME Speed 20 mph (32 km/h)
ACCEL Increase 1 mph (2 km/h)
DECEL Decrease 1 mph (2 km/h)
Dropout Speed 20 mph (32 km/h)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the
table below for the speed for your specific engine), the
speed control will automatically disengage. If this hap-
pens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
overdrive by pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button located
at the end of the gear shifter.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The manufacturer suggest disabling the Rear
Park Assist System when towing a trailer. Refer to
Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) – If Equipped, Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features) in section 3 of this Owner Manual.
This system is used to help drivers determine if an obstacle
is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in
addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for
objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in
the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 78.7
inches (200 cm). A warning display above the rear
window provides both visible and audible warnings
indicating the range of the object.
The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red
LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of
the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind
the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs
either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the
display above the rear window.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Park Assist LED’s
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 78.7 in. (200 cm) Yellow None
2nd LED 51.1 in. (130 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 45.2 in. (115 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in. (80 cm) 39.3 in. (100 cm) Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in. (65 cm) 33.5 in. (85 cm) Yellow None
6th LED 20 in. (50 cm) 27.6 in. (70 cm) Yellow None
7th LED 16 in. (40 cm) 19.7 in. (50 cm) Red at 12 in. (30 cm)
Intermittent
8th LED 6 in. (15 cm) 11.81 in. (30 cm) Red at 8 in. (20 cm)
Continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist System. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all. Ob-
stacles located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time
when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the Rear Park Assist System.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the
rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer.
To turn on/off the rear park assist system, refer to the
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) in
Section 3 of this Owner Manual.
REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Camera
system that allows you to see an on-screen image (located
in the screen of your Radio) of the rear of your vehicle
whenever it is put into R (Reverse). The camera is located
in the light bar over the rear license plate.
NOTE:
Refer to “Setting Display Properties” under “Sys-
tem Settings” in the Navigation User’s Manual for instruc-
tions regarding navigation screen brightness adjustments.
Use the following steps to access the Rear Backup Cam-
era feature:
1. Start the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal and place shift lever in R
(Reverse).
3. Wait one to two seconds, and the camera view will
display on the Radio screen.
NOTE: The camera view will display only while the
vehicle is in R (Reverse).
4. Perform a visual check of the rear area.
NOTE: CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS before
backing up.
5. Slowly backup as necessary.
6. Place the sift lever in P (Park) or D (Drive) to exit the
Rear Backup Camera system.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Camera System. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Camera System
should only be used as a parking aid and is unable
to view every obstacle, or object in your drive
path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Camera Sys-
tem to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver look fre-
quently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear
Camera System.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
•
Courtesy Lights
•
Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
•
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Near the front of the console is one courtesy and two
reading lights.
All lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. The two round lamps
are also operated individually as reading lights by press-
ing the center of each lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
turn off after 15 minutes.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC
VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF
EQUIPPED
The overhead console contains dome/reading lights, and
an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Dome/Reading Lights
Located in the overhead console are two dome/reading
lights.
The dome/reading lights illuminate when a door is
opened or when the interior lights are turned on by
rotating the dimmer control located on the Headlight
Switch.
The reading lights are activated by pressing the center of
each lens.
NOTE: The dome/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped
Pressing the menu button will change the
display to one of the following features:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
Trip Functions
Pressing the STEP button allows you to scroll through
one of the following Trip Function features:
•
TRIP – Shows the total distance traveled since the last
reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the
RESET button.
•
ELAPSED TIME – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START
positions.
•
UNIT IN US/METRIC – Press the RESET button to
toggle between US and METRIC.
•
AVG. MPG – Shows the average fuel economy since
the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the
display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the
history information will be erased, and the averaging
will continue from the last fuel average reading
before the reset. (Example: If your Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) displays 18 AVG. MPG and
the RESET button is pressed, the previous averaging
history will be erased and the display will return to the
18 AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG. MPG). The display may
take several miles for the value to change dependent
upon driving habits. If equipped with a 5.7L engine
and MDS (Multi Displacement System), FUEL SAVER
may be displayed along with the actual AVG. MPG. If
equipped with Multi-Displacement Engine System
(MDS) option, the EVIC will display FUEL SAVER
when in fuel economy mode.
•
MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) – Shows the
estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel
remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of fuel economy,
according to the current fuel tank level. MI TO EMPTY
cannot be reset through the RESET button.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
•
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of 9LOW FUEL.9 This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
9LOW FUEL9 text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Global Reset – If the RESET button is pressed twice
within 2 seconds while in any of the 3 resettable
displays (AVG.MPG, ET (ELAPSED TIME) and TRIP)
System Status (EVIC Displays)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
•
TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning chime)
•
PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE – Vehicle
Not in Park
•
LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime)
•
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with a single chime)
•
SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM (with a single chime)
•
SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
•
COOLANT LOW
•
LIFTGATE OPEN
•
CHECK TPM SYSTEM (with single chime) (Premium
TPM System Only)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK. If the trans-
mission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT
AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Press and release the menu button until the
Personal Settings displays on the EVIC.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the STEP button to display one of the following:
•
“LANGUAGE” – When in this display you may select
one of several different languages for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions. Press the
RESET button while in this display to select your
preferred language. Then, as you continue, the infor-
mation will display in the selected language.
•
“AUTO DOOR LOCKS > YES” – When ON is selected,
all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > YES” – When ON is
selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st” – When DRV DR 1st is
selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the
remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “DRV DR 1st ” appears.
•
“RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST” – When All ALL DR
1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first
press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until “All DR 1st” appears.
•
MEM. RECALL WITH RKE > YES – When ON is
selected, pressing the unlock button on the RKE will
recall the memory settings for the seat, mirror and
radio. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON9 or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3
•
“SOUND HORN W/LOCK > YES” – When ON is
selected, a short horn sound will occur when the
remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
•
“FLASH LAMPS w/LOCK >YES” – When ON is
selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC” – When this
feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the
head lamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
appears.
NOTE: The head lamp switch must be in the “A” auto
mode before this feature will work.
•
HEADLAMPS W /WIPERS > YES – When ON is
selected, the headlamps will automatically turn on
when the wiper switch is activated.
•
EASY EXIT SEAT > YES – When ON is selected, and
the key is removed from the ignition, the driver’s seat
will automatically move rearward to allow easy exit.
•
TILT MIRRORS IN “R” > YES – When On is selected,
and the transmission is put in reverse, the outside
mirrors will tilt downward.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
“KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF” – When this
feature is selected, the power window switches, radio,
hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door
will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5
min.,” “10 min.” appears.
•
“ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF” – When this feature
is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on
for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until
“OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
•
PARK ASST. SYSTEM > YES – When YES is selected,
the Rear Park Assist System is activated. When No is
selected, the System is deactivated.
•
“UNIT IN > US/METRIC” – The EVIC, odometer can
be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
•
“COMPASS VARIANCE > 8” – Press the RESET
button to change the compass variance setting. Set this
to your current location. If you change location,
change your variance according to your variance on
the variance map. Refer to Compass Variance, in this
section for additional information.
•
“COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES” – Press the RESET
button to manually calibrate the compass. Refer to
Manual Compass Calibration, in this section for addi-
tional information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
Compass/Temperature Button
Pressing the Compass/Temperature button
will return the display to the normal compass/
temperature display.
NOTE: Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat
soak. For best accuracy, the vehicle should be driven at a
speed greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for several min-
utes.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which reduces the need
to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns at speeds less than 5 mph (km/h)(in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the menu button until Personal Set-
tings is displayed.
3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass YES”
is displayed.
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the
calibration. The message “CAL” will display on the
compass temperature screen in the EVIC.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph in a
Complete 360°circle, (in an area free from large metal or
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message turns off.
The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the menu button until Personal Set-
tings is displayed.
3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” is
displayed.
4. Press and release RESET button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the variance map.
5. Press and release the Compass/Temperature button
to exit.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off of your vehi-
cle’s battery.
NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not
train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a
garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse”
feature as required by federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models manufac-
tured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener
without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–
3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
Programming HomeLinkT
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING CHAN-
NELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC message
states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (3–8 cm)
from the HomeLinkt buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLinkt.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLinkt button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
Then release both the HomeLinkt and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat Step
3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open & close while you train.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step #3 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming”
section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open & close the door).
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for 2 sec-
onds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for 2 seconds) to complete the training.
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
3
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink.” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLinkT
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkT Button
To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button for 20
seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with PRO-
GRAMMING HOMELINK Step #2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof control is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Pressing the 9open9 end of the rocker switch once moves
the panel to a comfort stop position. Pressing the switch
a second time causes the panel to continue moving
rearward, up to the full-open position.
To close the panel, the 9close9 end of the switch must be
pressed and held.
Pressing the “vent” button from a fully closed position,
raises the trailing edge of the panel for ventilation. When
the panel is venting, pressing the “close” end or the
rocker switch returns it to the closed position. Both
opening and closing operations in the vent mode occur
only while the switch is held.
NOTE: The sunroof will continue to operate for ten
minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until the
driver door is opened. This feature may be disabled by
your authorized dealer.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Express Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again. To
close fully, hold the switch in the forward position until
the glass movement has stopped.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
WARNING!
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object
to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
This vehicle has three auxiliary power outlets that can
provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de-
signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters.
The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument
panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered
when not in use. As a safety precaution, the outlet in the
instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch
ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is
used, it heats when pushed in and pops out automati-
cally when ready for use. To preserve the heating
element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
There are two additional 12 V/(20 total Amps for both
outlets) power outlets, one located in the storage bin of
the center console and another located in the right rear
cargo area. These outlets can be reconfigured by the
customer to operate only when the ignition is ON
(switched battery fed) or with the ignition ON or OFF
(battery fed) to allow for cellular telephone charging and
or operation while the ignition is off.
NOTE: All accessories connected to these outlets should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge (unless the cus-
tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery
feed). (See page 179 for more information.)
115V Inverter Outlet – If Equipped
This vehicle may also be equipped with a 115 Volt (150
Watts Maximum) outlet on the rear of the front center
console. These outlets can power cell phones, electronics
and other low power devices. This plug is controlled by
a switch located in left lower instrument panel.
Press the switch to turn the power on to the outlet. Press
the switch a second to turn the power off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
NOTE: When the Inverter Switch is pressed, there will
be a delay of approximately 1 second before the inverter
status indicator turns ON. The status Indicator of the AC
power inverter indicates whether the inverter is produc-
ing AC power.
NOTE: Due to build in overload protection the inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
•
Donotusea3—Prong Adaptor.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
115 V Inverter Switch
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF (Battery
Fed Configuration)
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
115V Inverter Plug
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
Reconfiguring Power Outlets
To reconfigure the outlets, be sure the ignition is OFF
before removing the fuse. The reconfigurable fuse loca-
tion is a special design that allows the fuse to be installed
in two different ways. If the fuse is located in the 9Upper
or Top Position9 the outlets will work at all times. If the
fuse is located in the 9Lower or Bottom Position9 the
power outlets will only work when the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The fuse block is located in the left side kick
panel behind a removable cover near the park brake
pedal. Afuse puller is attached to the inside surface of the
fuse panel cover to aid in removing fuses, if necessary.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FLOOR CONSOLE
Floor Console Features
The Floor Console between the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat, has the following features:
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments
•
Flexible cup holder inserts
•
Portable phone storage bin
•
Portable phone cord routing between lid and base on
forward edge
•
12 Volt reconfigurable power outlet inside storage
compartment
•
Side open armrest lid
•
Tissue holder & pen holder
•
Coin slots
•
Removable CD bin
The coin slots are located under the instrument panel
center stack.
Cup Holders
Your vehicle has 8 cupholders. Four are located in the
center console, two are located in the second row armrest,
and two are located in the left hand quarter panel for
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
3
third row occupants. The four cupholders located in the
center console may be removed for cleaning.
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage
The console is equipped with a power outlet, portable
phone storage bin, and phone cord routing. The phone
storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is
needed. Also, the power outlet inside the console com-
partment can be used to power up the phone while it is
being stored in the bin. To use, plug in the portable power
recharge cord and place the cord along the opening
under the forward portion of the storage bin. Close the
console armrest lid and plug the power cord into the
phone while resting the phone in the bin. The power
outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard
12 volt power outlet adaptor, requiring up to 20 Amps of
current.
Rear Floor Console Features – If Equipped
The Rear Floor Console located between the second row
bucket seat, has the following features:
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments
•
Cup holders
•
Portable phone cord routing on the sides of the console
lid and the base.
•
12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment
•
Tissue holder & pen holder
•
Second row heated seat switches (if equipped).
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To access the storage bin, lift up on the console door latch.
FACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK
The load carried on the roof when equipped with a
luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg (150 lbs.), and should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Rear Floor Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
The side rails between the stantions should be used to tie
down cargo. Check the straps frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars are offered by Mopart accessories.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM—IF EQUIPPED
The cargo management system consists of a removable
cargo liner and removable cargo organizer.
1 - Side Cover Latch
2 - Main Cover Latch
3 - Cargo Divider Handles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
To open the side cover, pull on the cover latch, and attach
the cord to the upper cargo net hook.
To open the main cover, pull up on the latch, and attach
the cord to the rear seat head restraint post.
To open the Cargo divider, lift up on the cargo divider
handles, raising the doors to the full open position. Raise
the side panels until they engage into the doors.
To remove the cargo management system from the ve-
hicle, pull the right hand side of the organizer towards
you so that the right pin slides out of the slot in the
vehicle. Push the organizer to the right and lift out of the
vehicle.
1 - Cargo Divider Door
2 - Cargo Divider Side Panel
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CONTENTS
m Instruments And Controls .................191
m Instrument Cluster ......................192
m Instrument Cluster Description .............193
m Electronic Digital Clock ..................204
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................204
m Radio General Information ................205
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals .................205
▫ Two Types Of Signals ..................205
▫ Electrical Disturbances ..................205
▫ AM Reception .......................205
▫ FM Reception ........................205
m Sales Code REN — Multimedia System — If
Equipped ............................206
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) ........................207
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) . .207
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................207
4
m Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) ................209
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......209
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ..................215
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............217
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) .......219
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) .......219
m Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio
And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) ..................221
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......221
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) ....229
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ........231
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ..............................234
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ..............................234
m Sales Code RER — Multimedia System — If
Equipped ............................236
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio .....237
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) . .237
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................237
m Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If
Equipped ............................240
▫ Connecting The iPodt ..................240
▫ Controlling The iPodt Using Radio Buttons . . .240
▫ Play Mode ..........................241
188 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
▫ List Or Browse Mode ..................243
m Video Entertainment System
(Sales Code XRV) — If Equipped ............244
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped ..............244
▫ System Activation .....................245
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) ....................245
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And
RAK Radios .........................246
▫ Selecting a Channel ....................247
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ......247
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button — If
Equipped ...........................247
▫ PTY Button 9Scan9 .....................247
▫ PTY Button 9Seek9 .....................248
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................248
▫ Reception Quality .....................248
m Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . .249
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions .............249
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation ...........................249
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media
(i.e. CD) Operation ....................250
m Compact Disc Maintenance ................250
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ........251
m Climate Controls .......................251
▫ Manual Control ......................251
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 189
4
▫ Air Conditioning Operation ..............252
▫ Front Blower Control ...................252
▫ Front Mode Control ...................253
▫ Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped ....255
▫ Rear Window Defrosting And Rear Window
Washer/Wiper .......................256
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ...........................256
▫ Automatic Control ....................257
▫ Level Of Automatic Control ..............257
▫ Manual Control (ATC) ..................258
▫ Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped . . .261
▫ Rear Rotary Temperature Control ..........262
▫ Front Unit To Rear Unit Chart ............263
▫ Operating Tips .......................263
▫ Operating Tips Chart ...................265
m Rear Window Features ...................266
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............266
▫ Rear Window Defrosting ................267
190 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 191
4
Instrument Cluster
192 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gage
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when
ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Temperature Gage
The temperature gage indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the cooling system is operat-
ing satisfactorily. The gage needle in V6 and V8 engines
will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in
hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or
when towing a trailer. If the needle rises to the “H” mark,
stop the vehicle, shift into N (Neutral) increase engine
speed for 2-3 minutes. If the temperature reading does
not return to normal, seek authorized service immedi-
ately.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en-
gine running as you would not be able to react to the
temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when
the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading
when the engine is restarted.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 193
4
left/right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM
vehicle speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more
than one mile.
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads
1/16 of a tank or less.
5. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light comes on for several seconds after the
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat
belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indicates a
fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
7. Coolant Temperature Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. For a bulb check, this light will come on
momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shift into N
(Neutral) and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3
minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, seek authorized service immediately.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
the light turns off. If the if the light remains on, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for service.
194 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
8. Speedometer
Shows the vehicles speed.
9. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
10. Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set.
The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
11. ABS Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
which is described elsewhere in this manual.
This light will come on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
approximately 3 seconds. If this light remains on or
comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. See your authorized dealer immedi-
ately. With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are
also switched off. Both malfunction indicator lights illu-
minate with the engine running. If the charging voltage
falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator light
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 195
4
illuminates and the ABS is switched off. When the
voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indi-
cator light should go out and the ABS is operational. If
the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated, have
the system checked at your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
12. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light
This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has
become too low. For a bulb check, this light will
come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. Immediate service
should be obtained.
13. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(rpm x 1000).
14. Gear Selector
The electronic gear selector display is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of
each position to all other positions. For a good signal the
display will place a box around the selected transmission
range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the char-
acters PRND21 (no boxes) have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed
during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of
the reading before and after the service so that the correct
mileage can be determined.
196 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom-
eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the
display resets (approximately 2 seconds).
Vehicle Warning Messages
For non-Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, and the appropriate conditions exist,
messages such as “door ajar” (indicates that a door(s)
may be ajar), “gASCAP” (which indicates that your gas
cap is possibly loose or damaged), 9CHANgE OIL”
(indicates that the engine oil should be change), “Lo-
WASH” (low washer fluid), and “noFUSE” (indicates
that the IOD fuse is removed from the Integrated Power
Module), will display in the odometer.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an EVIC, most
warnings will display in the EVIC. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped” in Section 3.
The outside temperature will display in the odometer for
non-EVIC equipped vehicles. Pressing the trip odometer
reset button toggles the feature back to the odometer.
Change Oil Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 197
4
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
16. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
17. Fog Light Indicator
This light shows when the fog lights are ON.
18. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedom-
eter area illuminates with the key in the igni-
tion switch turned to the ON/RUN position. It
should go out with the engine running. The
198 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
9ESP/TCS Indicator Light9 starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The
9ESP/TCS Indicator Light9 also flashes when TCS is
active. If the 9ESP/TCS Indicator Light9 begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” becomes illuminated when the
ESP-Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially
available caused by lack of engine management or brake
thermal model.
19. Transmission Temperature Indicator
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL until the light goes off.
20. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
lem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
21. BRAKE System Warning Light
The red “BRAKE” warning light will come on when the
ignition key is first turned on, and stay on briefly as a
bulb check. If the bulb does not come on during starting,
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 199
4
have the bulb repaired promptly. If the light stays on, it
may be an indication that the parking brake has not been
released, or there is a low brake fluid level. If the light
remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged,
and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master
cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic
system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
Booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake.
If the parking brake is applied, the light will flash when
the gear position is out of park for automatic transmis-
sions.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary. Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger-
ous!
22. ESP/BAS Warning Lamp
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined
with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster both come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
They should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: • 9The 9ESP/TCS Indicator Light9 and the 9ESP/
BAS Warning Lamp9 come on momentarily each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. • The ESP Control System
will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively
operating.
200 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
23. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
which monitors the emissions and engine control
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 10
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condi-
tion investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 201
4
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Ac-
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
202 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
25. Airbag Indicator
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If
the light does not come on when the ignition is
first turned on, or the light stays on or comes on while
driving, have the airbag system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
26. 4WD Indicator
Indicates when transfer case is in 4WD position.
27. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator
The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key
is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2
seconds. If the light stays on or comes on during driving,
it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
28. Cruise Light (Speed Control)
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
29. TOW/HAUL
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/
HAUL button has been selected.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 203
4
30. 4LOW Indicator
Indicates transfer case is in 4LOW position.
31. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
ing is accurately maintained.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alter-
nates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one
of the two, time or frequency is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
204 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 205
4
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
SALES CODE REN — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN multimedia system contains a radio, CD/DVD
player, USB port, a 20 gigabyte Hard Drive (HDD), and a
“JukeBox” (virtual CD changer). Sirius Satellite Radio is
optional. The 6.5-inch touch screen allows for easy menu
selection.
A 20 gigabyte Hard Drive (HDD) allows uploads of
music and photos from CDs or through the USB port.
While the Gracenote database finds the artist, track, and
title for the music.
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES), separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the car speakers while different audio tracks play
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and front
seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, easy store presets, backup camera display for
vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and on some
models a dual display screen operation. Refer to your
Radio Specific User’s Manual for detailed operating
instructions.
206 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your Radio Specific User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in
Section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
Setting the Clock
1. Turn on the system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 207
4
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the system is turned off.
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
208 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES Radio (Non-Satellite Model Shown -
With Satellite Similar)
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 209
4
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies,
pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect™ Hands Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UCon-
nect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Commu-
nication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With UCon-
nect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UCon-
nect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Com-
munication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more informa-
tion.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With UCon-
nect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
control knob.
210 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE
control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 211
4
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or turning
the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the
program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do
not currently broadcast Music Type information.
Toggle the Music Type button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
212 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
user to set the clock. Turn the TUNE control knob to
adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE
control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE
control knob again to save changes.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 213
4
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be stored into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM and 12 FM
stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
214 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
an inch, a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected
before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 215
4
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
MP3 modes.
SCAN Button
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
216 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign a
number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 217
4
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
218 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 219
4
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to
return to 9elapsed time9 display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If theAUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for 5 seconds (when ignition is
off).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone
(UConnect™) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in
Section 3 of this manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.”
220 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
REQ Radio
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 221
4
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect™ Hands Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UCon-
nect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Com-
munication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more informa-
tion.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “UConnect™ System Not
Available” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UCon-
nect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Com-
munication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more informa-
tion.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “UConnect™ System Not
Available” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
control knob.
222 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE
control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
2.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 223
4
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or turning
the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the
program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do
not currently broadcast Music Type information.
Toggle the Music Type button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
224 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the
entries. Push the Audio/Select button to select an entry
and make changes.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 225
4
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (If Equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (If Equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (If Equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (If Equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (If
Equipped).
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.
NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
a DVD.
•
VES Power - Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF (If
Equipped).
•
VES Lock - Locks out rear VES remote controls (If
Equipped).
•
VES CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change mode of
either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones, by pressing
the Audio/Select button (If Equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button will
allow user to set the clock. Turn the TUNE control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the
TUNE control knob again to save changes.
226 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If customer wishes to select
a language not listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9
Enter the 4-digit country code using the TUNE control
knob to scroll up and down to select the # and then push
to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default
audio language (effective only if language supported by
disc). If customer wishes to select a language not listed,
then scroll down and select 9other.9 Enter the country
code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down
to select the # and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default
subtitle language (effective only if language supported
by disc). If customer wishes to select a language not
listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9 Enter the
country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up
and down to select the # and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
subtitle OFF or ON.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 227
4
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum
audio dynamic range - The default is set to 9High,9 and
under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher
than if the setting is 9Normal.9
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted, it
will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play
the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto play the main title. In such cases, use the menu
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons (Radio Mode)
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
228 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of 5 times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 229
4
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the push-button with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
9INSERT DISC,9 insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the eject button and the push-button with
the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD
was loaded and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display
will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc is being
ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs
will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
MP3/MWA modes.
230 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMAfiles; however, acceptable
MP3/WMAfile recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 231
4
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as 9keep
disc open after writing9 are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi formats, such as CD audio and
mp3/wma tracks, the radio will only play the mp3/wma
tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
232 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 233
4
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to
return to 9elapsed time9 display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If theAUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
234 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone
(UConnect™) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in
Section 3 of this manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.”
Dolby
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
9Dolby9 and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 235
4
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
DTS
9DTS9 and 9DTS 2.09 are trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.
SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The RER multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
Satellite Radio player, Navigation system, CD/DVD
player, USB port, 20 gigabyte Hard Drive (HDD), and the
UConnectt hands-free Bluetooth cellular system.
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnectt,
the unit will respond with a “Feature Not Available”
message when selecting controls related to this feature.
A6.5-inch touch screen allows easy menu selection, while
the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than
1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertainment, and
hands-free mobile phone use.
The satellite navigation capability combines a Global-
Positioning System-based navigation system with an
integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identifica-
tion, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes.
A shared Hard Drive (HDD) for the navigation system,
the database, and other radio features allows uploads of
236 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
music and photos from CDs or through the USB port.
While the Gracenote database finds the artist, track, and
title for the music.
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES), separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the car speakers while different audio tracks play
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and front
seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, Traffic Messaging (optional), easy store pre-
sets, parental lockout for VES (if equipped), backup
camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup
camera, and on some models a dual display screen
operation. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 237
4
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the
top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where
the words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Setting the User Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
performing the following:
1. Turn on the system.
238 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top
of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the
words “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the system is turned off.
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 239
4
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ
radios only with UConnect.™ For sales code REN touch
screen radio, refer to the separate User’s Manual.
This feature allows you to plug in an iPodt into the
vehicle’s sound system through a connector (UCI connec-
tor) using an optional connection cable (available
through Mopart). See your authorized dealer for details.
Using this feature,
•
the iPodt audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (Track Title, Artist, Al-
bum, etc.) information display on radio.
•
the iPodt can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse and List the iPodt contents.
•
the iPodt battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector.
Connecting the iPodT
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPodt to
the vehicle’s UCI connector (which is located in the glove
box on some vehicles. This location may vary with
vehicle). Once the iPodt is connected and synchronized
to the vehicle system (this may take a few seconds to
connect), the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPodt
display, and it starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches as described below.
Controlling the iPodT using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPodt) mode and access a connected
iPodt, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPodt) mode, the iPodt audio track (if
available from iPodt) will start playing over the vehicle
audio system.
240 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode the iPodt will be in Play
mode. In this Play mode , you may use the following
buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPodt and
display data:
TUNE/SCROLL Knob
Use the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to go to the next or
previous track.
The “TUNE/SCROLL” knob functions similar to the
scroll wheel on the iPodt.
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click while playing
a track skips to the next track.
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click
during the first 2 seconds of the track will jump to the
previous track in the list and turning this button at any
other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
RW (Rewind) Button
Press and hold the “RW” button to move backward in the
current track. Holding the “RW” button long enough will
take you back to the beginning of the current track.
Pressing and releasing the “RW” button will go back 5
seconds of the current track.
FF (Fast Forward) Button
Press and hold the “FF” button to move forward in the
current track.
Pressing and releasing the “FF” button will go forward 5
seconds of the current track.
SEEK Buttons
Use the “SEEK” buttons to move to the previous or the
next track.
If the left (down) button is pressed during the first 2
seconds of the current track, it will go back to the
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 241
4
previous track in the list, if you press this button at any
other time in the current track it will go back to the
beginning of the track.
If the right (up) button is pressed during Play mode, it
will go to the next track in the list.
INFO Button
Press the “INFO” button while a track is playing to see
the information (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) for that
track. Each press the “INFO” button will take you to the
next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all
of the screens, the last press of the “INFO” button will
take you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
REPEAT Button
Press the “REPEAT” button to repeat the current playing
track
SCAN Button
Pressing the “SCAN” button will play the first 5 seconds
of each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, press the “SCAN” button again.
During the SCAN mode, you can also press the SEEK
button to the left or right to go to the previous or next
tracks.
RND (Random) Button (RES Radios Only)
Pressing the “RND” button will switch between the
shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPodt.Ifthe
“RND” icon is showing on the radio display then the
shuffle mode is on.
242 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
List or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the following buttons
will take you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPodt.
TUNE/SCROLL Knob
In the List mode, the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPodt.
Turning the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob clockwise (forward)
and counter-clockwise (backward) scrolls through lists,
displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once you
have the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select and
start playing the track. By turning the “TUNE/SCROLL”
knob fast, you can jump through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating the
information on the radio display.
During all List modes, the iPodt will display all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track you wish to select is
at the bottom of the list, you just turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” knob backwards (counter-clockwise) to get to
the track faster.
Radio Preset Buttons
In the List mode, the radio preset buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPodt.
•
1 – Playlists
•
2 – Artists
•
3 – Albums
•
4 – Genres
•
5 - Audiobooks
•
6 – Podcasts
After pressing a preset button, you will see the list you
are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 243
4
To exit the List mode without selecting a track, press the
same preset button again to go back to Play mode.
LIST Button
Pressing the “LIST” button will take to the top level
menu of the iPodt. This takes you to the same top level
menu as on your iPodt. Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL”
knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and
then press the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob. This will take
you to the next sub menu list item of the iPodt and you
can follow the same the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPodt sub menu levels are
available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE Button
The “MUSIC TYPE” button is another shortcut button to
the genre listing on your iPodt.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con-
sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two head-
sets. The system is located in the headliner behind the
front row seat. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for
detailed operating instructions.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
244 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of
SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory-
installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will
contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm
subscription information, including the set up of your
on-line listening account at no additional charge. For
further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-
7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com.
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access with REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will display. Press the
SEEK UP button to display the next four digits. Continue
to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID
digits display. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits display. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 245
4
ESN/SID Access with RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode
when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned
OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was
pushed.
ESN/SID Access with REC Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta-
neously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the
screen.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information, such as song
title and artist, press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
246 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word 9SCAN9 will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button — If
Equipped
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button (SCAN(
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
9SCAN9 button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the 9SCAN9
button a second time to stop the search.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 247
4
NOTE: Pressing the 9SEEK9 or 9SCAN9 button, while
performing a music type scan, will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button (SEEK(
When the desired program is obtained, press the 9SEEK9
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with
a luggage rack, do not place items on the roof around the
rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the
line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor-
mance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far
forward as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
248 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left- and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a push-button in
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering
wheel to access the switches.
Right-Hand Switch Functions
•
Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc).
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation
•
Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Remote Sound Controls
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 249
4
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Media (i.e. CD)
Operation
•
Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track.
•
Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
•
Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
and so forth.
•
Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
250 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Control
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. The
following describes its operation:
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 251
4
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn the air conditioning On or Off perform the
following steps:
•
Position the mode control button to the desired airflow
setting.
•
Set the front blower control to any desired speed.
•
Press the Snowflake (A/C) button which is located to
the right of the temperature control slide. An indicator
light on the Snowflake (A/C) button shows that the air
conditioning is On.
•
Press the Snowflake (A/C) button a second time to
turn the air conditioning Off.
NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine
has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in
engine speed or power may be noticed when the com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal occurrence since the
compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and
improve fuel economy.
Front Blower Control
The Front Blower controls the
amount of air delivered to the
passenger compartment.
There are four blower speeds.
The fan speed increases as
you turn the control clock-
wise. When the front blower
control is turned to OFF, the
blower will be turned off and
the system will be positioned
in recirculation mode.
252 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Front Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both
modes.
Recirculation Mode (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select either the Panel or Bi-Level
mode positions when the outside air
contains smoke, odors, high humidity,
or if rapid cooling of the interior is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only, when ei-
ther of these positions are selected. Air
flows through the panel outlets or panel and floor outlets
in these modes.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct the airflow.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 253
4
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Heat (Floor)
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel. A small
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlet.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlet located at the base of
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies
the air to help dry the windshield.
254 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Temperature Control
The temperature of the air is controlled by a slide located
on the top center of the control panel. Move the slide left
or right to change the temperature. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
Rotating this knob left to the
“REAR CONTROL” position
allows the passengers in the
second and third row seats to
control the blower speed and
temperature by means of the
rear control located in the rear
of the center floor console as
described under “Rear Zone
Control.” Rotating this knob
to the “OFF” position, turns off the rear climate controls.
Rotating this knob to the right of the “OFF” position
allows the Driver and front passenger to control the rear
blower speed, and the rear temperature using the front
temperature slide. The mode, front or rear, is always
controlled by the front mode control. For example: Panel
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 255
4
mode on the front control will give you air from the
outlets in the headliner in the rear. Floor mode in the
front will give you floor in the rear.
Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window
Washer/Wiper
See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The control can be turned on by pressing the POWER
knob. When the control is turned on, it will be in the last
mode prior to being turned off. Pressing the POWER
knob again will turn off the control. The control can also
be turned on by pressing any button and it will display
the corresponding operation mode for that button.
256 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Automatic Control
The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in
various weather conditions with a simple operation:
•
Select your desired temperature setting by pressing
the + or - side of the TEMP rocker switches. A digital
temperature setting for driver and passenger will be
displayed. The ATC system uses an infrared sensor
located in the overhead console to measure the tem-
perature of the driver and passengers. Based on the
sensor input, the system will automatically control
comfort by varying the temperature, fan speed, and
mode. This maintains a comfortable temperature, even
under changing conditions. It is important that objects
are not blocking the infrared sensor. It is also impor-
tant that objects are not used that may scratch or
damage it in any way.
Level Of Automatic Control
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person, however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic control operation. It is
not necessary to move the temperature setting for cold or
hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the tem-
perature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
NOTE: In cold weather, the fan will not turn on in
AUTO mode until the engine coolant has warmed up
sufficiently. This is indicated by the WARM UP DELAY
message on the display.
NOTE: The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric by selecting the US/M customer programmable
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 257
4
feature. Refer to the 9Overhead Console-Customer Pro-
grammable Features.9 The mode will also be shown in the
display and will change as required during automatic
operation.
NOTE: The system can be put into recirculate mode
without affecting ATC operation. This will prevent out-
side air from entering the vehicle. Use this mode to
temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust.
Manual Control (ATC)
You also may choose to customize your comfort by
selecting the fan speed and mode manually. Turning the
fan speed knob or any mode button places the system
into manual operation.
While in manual operation there are six fan speeds
available and the choice of any mode. The airflow
temperature is adjusted automatically to maintain the
desired comfort level. You can adjust the temperature by
pressing the + or - TEMP rocker switches.
FAN Control
Use this knob to regulate the amount of air delivered
through the system in any mode you select. Rotation
of the knob to increase (clockwise) or decrease (counter-
clockwise) fan speed.
Air Conditioning Operation
Press this button to enable the air conditioning
system. Compressor operation is automatic when
you press the AUTO button and no snowflake is
shown. A snowflake indicates that the A/C system is
enabled. The snowflake will not be displayed in AUTO
mode even though the A/C system is enabled.
The compressor may operate at any temperature above
32°F (0°C).
NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine
has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in
258 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
engine speed or power may be noticed when the com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal occurrence since the
compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and
improve fuel economy.
Recirculate Button
Press this button to recirculate the air inside the
vehicle. Outside air is prevented from entering
the vehicle. Use this mode to temporarily block
out any outside odors, smoke, dust or when
rapid cooling of the interior is required.
Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel,
Floor, and Bi-Level modes. It will not operate in Mix, or
Defrost modes. The recirculation symbol will flash three
times indicating recirculation is not available in these
modes.
NOTE: If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
the recirculate button to return to outside air. Some
conditions will cause captured interior air to fog win-
dows when in recirculate mode.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
the airflow.
Floor (Heat)
Air flows primarily through the floor outlets lo-
cated under the instrument panel. A small amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 259
4
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Defrost
Outside air is directed to the windshield through
the defroster outlet located at the base of the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C snowflake button has not been pressed. This
dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield.
Rear Temperature Control (ATC)
The “REAR” button cycles through the following modes:
Rear Control from Front
This allows the driver or passenger to control the rear
blower speeds rotating the POWER / FAN knob and the
rear temperature using the pass/rear TEMP +/- rocker
switch. While in this mode, pressing the POWER/FAN
knob will turn the rear system off. Pressing the POWER/
FAN knob will turn the rear system back on.
NOTE: The display will show a 9REAR9 fan speed graph
and a 9REAR9 digital temp setting.
CONTROL IN REAR
This allows the passengers in the second row seats to
control the blower speed and temperature by means of
the rear control located in the rear of the center floor
console as described under the 9Rear Zone Climate
Control.9
NOTE: The front display will show “CONTROL IN
REAR.”
260 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
REAR OFF
This turns the rear system off. The control will return to
the front system display after approximately 5 seconds if
no buttons are pushed while in one of the rear system
displays. You may also return to the front system display
sooner by pushing any button except the POWER/FAN
knob, the rear button, the driver/passenger temp rocker
buttons.
NOTE: The display will show “REAR OFF.”
REAR AUTO
This mode places the rear system in automatic tempera-
ture control. Rear temperature can be set as desired (72
recommended for average person) and will be displayed
digitally on the front control when in rear mode.
Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window
Washer/Wiper
See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book.
Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped
Headliner air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vane knobs on the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 261
4
The rear compartment control uses two rotary knobs: one
for the temperature control and the other for the fan
speed control. The mode for the rear air conditioning and
heating system is always controlled by the front control
unit. Fan and temperature can be controlled from the
front control unit or the rear control unit.
Rear Rotary Blower Control
The second row seat occupants have control of the rear
blower speed, only when the front control unit is in the
“REAR CONTROL” position or CONTROL IN REAR9
for ATC.9
The rear blower switch has an “Off” position and a range
of blower speeds. Rotating the rear blower control clock-
wise will increase the blower speed.
Rear Rotary Temperature Control
The second row seat occupants have contorl of the rear
temperature only when the front control unit is in the
9REAR CONTROL9 position.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob to the right or left.
The blue area indicates cooler temperatures while the red
area indicates warmer temperatures.
262 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
NOTE: For best operation, make sure that ventilation
grilles located in the rear storage area are not obstructed
by stowed articles.
Front Unit to Rear Unit Chart
If the Front Control is
selected
Rear Airflow will come
from
Panel Headliner
Bi-Level Headliner
Floor Floor
Mix Floor
Defrost Floor
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, set the blower fan to the highest
setting, set the mode control to the panel fresh position,
press the snowflake button to turn on the air condition-
ing, and drive with the windows open for the first few
minutes. Once the hot air has been expelled, close the
windows and set the mode selector to the Recirculation
panel or Recirculation Bi-level position. When a comfort-
able condition has been reached, choose a mode position
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 263
4
and adjust the temperature control and blower speed as
necessary to maintain comfort. For high humidity condi-
tions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation
mode to maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. Interior fogging
on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting
the defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions. This will also prevent snow ingestion into the
ducts.
264 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Operating Tips Chart
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 265
4
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A rotating switch located on the climate control
panel turns the rear wiper On or Off. Pressing the
rotating switch inward activates the rear window
washer. Rotating the switch will enable one of five
intermittent delay times for the rear wiper. The delay
times range from 20 to 1 second.
266 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
off, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume operation.
Rear Window Defrosting
Apush-button type switch is located in the climate
control panel. Press the switch and the rear win-
dow defroster and electric remote control heated mirrors
(if equipped) will turn On. An amber indicator on the
push-button will light when the defroster is turned On.
An symbol will be displayed when the defroster is turned
on with an ATC control. Push again to turn Off prior to
time-out. The defroster will automatically turn Off after
fifteen minutes. For ten more minutes of operation, push
the button again. To prevent excessive battery drain, use
the defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window
to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe
distance from the window to prevent damaging the
heating elements.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 267
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures .....................273
▫ Automatic Transmission ................273
▫ Normal Starting ......................273
m Engine Block Heater – If Equipped ..........276
m Automatic Transmission ..................276
▫ Automatic Transmission ................276
m Four-Wheel Drive Operation ...............281
▫ NV 140 Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions – If Equipped ......281
▫ NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating
Information / Precautions ...............282
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
Transfer Case ........................286
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............287
m Driving Through Water ..................288
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................288
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................288
m Parking Brake .........................290
5
m Brake System ..........................291
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .291
m Power Steering ........................294
m Electronic Brake Control System ............295
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............295
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) ...............296
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) ............298
▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) ..........298
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .........299
m Multi Displacement System (MDS) — 5.7L
Engine Only ..........................304
m Tire Safety Information ...................305
▫ Tire Markings ........................305
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........308
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........309
m Tires — General Information ...............313
▫ Tire Pressure .........................313
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................314
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................316
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped .........317
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped .........317
▫ Tire Spinning ........................318
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................319
▫ Life Of Tire .........................319
▫ Replacement Tires .....................320
▫ Alignment And Balance .................321
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
m Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If
Equipped ............................322
m Tire Chains ...........................322
m Snow Tires ...........................323
m Tire Rotation Recommendations ............324
m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) — If
Equipped ............................325
▫ Base System – If Equipped ...............327
▫ Premium System – If Equipped ...........329
▫ General Information ...................332
m Fuel Requirements ......................332
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................333
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............333
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................334
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................335
▫ Fuel System Cautions ..................335
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............336
m Adding Fuel ..........................336
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............336
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) Message ....338
m Flexible Fuel — If Equipped ...............339
▫ E-85 General Information ................339
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................340
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................340
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .......341
▫ Starting ............................341
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
5
▫ Cruising Range .......................342
▫ Replacement Parts .....................342
▫ Maintenance .........................342
m Vehicle Loading ........................343
▫ Certification Label .....................343
▫ Curb Weight .........................344
▫ Loading ............................344
m Trailer Towing .........................346
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............346
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............351
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........352
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............352
▫ Towing Requirements ..................353
▫ Towing Tips .........................357
m Snowplow ............................359
m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . .360
▫ Recreational Towing 2WD Models .........360
▫ Recreational Towing 4WD Models .........360
m Equipment Identification Plate .............364
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep
in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently
moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the
accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in
the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and
vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
Tip Start Feature
Your vehicle has a “Tip Start” starting system. With “Tip
Start” the driver does not need to hold the key in the
’Start’ position until the vehicle starts, but can release the
key (still in the ignition) and the vehicle will continue
through the start cycle.
•
Turn the ignition key to the START position, until the
start motor engages.
•
Release the key (still in the ignition) and the starter
will continue through the start cycle until the vehicle
starts or for 5 seconds (whichever comes first).
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected
engines and will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER – IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord.
The 3.7L/4.7L engine block heater cord is located at the
front of the engine compartment near the radiator cap.
The 5.7L engine block heater cord is located on the left
side of the engine compartment and rearward of the
power distribution center.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Automatic Transmission
The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates
the transmission gear selected. The selector lever is
mounted on the right side of the steering column. To
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
desired drive position. Pull selector lever toward you
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or
when shifting out of Park.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
“P” Park
Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission.
Engine can be started in this range. Never use Park while
vehicle is in motion. Apply parking brake when leaving
vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first,
then place selector in Park position.
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
pulling the lever toward you, after you have set it in
P (Park). Make sure it is in Park before leaving the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission
as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
“R” Reverse
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
“N” Neutral
Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. Engine may be started in
this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the
vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle (except as specified under
Towing A Disabled Vehicle), coasting, or otherwise driv-
ing the vehicle while in N (Neutral) can cause severe
transmission damage
“D” Drive
For most city and highway driving.
“2” Second
For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain
roads where more precise speed control is desirable. Use
it also when climbing long grades, and for engine brak-
ing when descending moderately steep grades. To pre-
vent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per
hour (72 km/h) in this range.
“1” First
For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at
low speeds 25 mph (40 km/h) or less when going down
hill. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h) in this range.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift
from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
•
the transmission selector is in Drive;
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
•
the “TOW/HAUL” switch has not been activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
ture.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal opera-
tion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if
equipped) is disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are
modified. Shifts into Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed
during steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and
automatic closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for
improved braking) will occur during steady braking.
The “TOW/HAUL” light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired,
the button must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch within the torque
converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under heavier
acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling
or response during normal operation in high gear. When
the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or
during acceleration, the clutch automatically and
smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in Over-
drive and in Drive.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the9TOW/HAUL9 button will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
NV 140 Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions – If Equipped
The NV 140 is a single speed (HI range only) transfer case
which provides convenient full-time 4–wheel drive. No
driver interaction is required. This transfer case divides
engine torque almost evenly with 48 percent of engine
torque to the front axle and 52 percent of engine torque to
the rear axle.
Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
Because four-wheel-drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
4WD
Normal Four-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs inter-
axle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. All road surfaces.
NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating
Information / Precautions
The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case
and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is
located on the instrument panel.
The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides 4 mode
positions - Normal four-wheel-drive (4WD) high range,
four-wheel-drive lock (4WD LOCK), four-wheel-drive
low (4WD LOW) range, and neutral (N).
This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differ-
ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal
all-wheel-drive position (4WD) at all times on any given
road surface, including dry hard surfaced roads. The
4WD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and
component wear normally associated with driving the
vehicle in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced
roads. This feature provides the safety, security, and
convenience of operating in all-wheel drive at all times
regardless of road conditions.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOCK
and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front
and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case
inter-axle differential and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to these positions. The
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be
used for recreational towing only. See Recreational Tow-
ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and
out of Neutral (N).
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
instrument cluster. If there are no indicator lights on or
flashing the transfer case position is Four-Wheel Drive
(4WD) and indicate the current and desired transfer case
selection (4WD ⇔ 4WD LOCK).
The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift
4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up
or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that service is
required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the (Service 4WD( light is illu-
minated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 244 Generation
II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and
therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the
transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 40 km/h
(25 mph).
Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the following informa-
tion:
4WD
Normal Four-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs inter-
axle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. All road surfaces.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel-Drive Lock (4WD LOCK)- Locks the transfer
case inter-axle differential. Forces front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel-Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)- Low speed 4
wheel drive. Locks the transfer case inter-axle differen-
tial. Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h).
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
5
Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
Transfer Case
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
4WD/ 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no
traction). In this situation a position indicator light will
flash and the original position indicator light will remain
ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to
13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have
stopped spinning.
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of the 4WD LOCK position
may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire
pressure, or excessive loading.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The indicator light will flash and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
the selection, turn the control knob back to the current
position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry the shift.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
5
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches deep will
require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam-
age to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following before
doing so:
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing water that
is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that is
under waterand if there are any obstacles in the way before
driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your
vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your ve-
hicle’s fluids (i.e. engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e. fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not
continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears con-
taminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to
lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to
the engine. Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle
limited warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
5
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear-shift lever is in PARK position. When parking on
a hill you should apply the Parking Brake before placing
the gear shift lever in PARK; otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the selector out of PARK.
NOTE: The instrument cluster brake warning light
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or vehicle may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in Park. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason, (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning Lamp and the ABS Lamp during brake use.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
surfaces. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same
size and type and tires must be properly inflated to
produce accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under inflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed self-
test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot
lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may
feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow. This is normal. The Anti-Lock
Brake System pump motor runs during the self-test at 12
mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump
motor makes a low humming noise during operation,
which is normal.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating
that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep firm and
steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing
the pulsation. Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
results in optimal braking power while maintaining the
ability to steer the vehicle. In the case of an emergency
brake maneuver, keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal. In this manner only can the ABS be most
effective. On slippery road surfaces, theABS will respond
even with light brake pedal pressure because of the
increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated elec-
tronic equipment. It may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be done by
qualified professionals.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the Anti-lock Brake system, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is
the result of the system reverting to the base brake
system.
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-
cate that the system is functioning properly.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when pos-
sible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System), BAS (Brake Assist System), TCS (Traction Con-
trol System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation), ESP (Elec-
tronic Stability Program) and TSC (Trailer Sway Control).
All six systems work together to enhance vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions, and are com-
monly referred to as ESP.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.
NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system
ESP Off Switch Location
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency
braking conditions. This can help reduce braking dis-
tances. The BAS complements the antilock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the
best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system,
you must apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
•
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
TCS (Traction Control System)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this Section of this manual. This brake
pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping
to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward trac-
tion.
ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu-
vers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
•
ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropri-
ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The 9ESP/TCS Indicator Light9 starts to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the TCS or
ESP system becomes active. It will also flash
once a swaying trailer is detected and the TSC
(Trailer Sway Control) system activates. If the 9ESP/TCS
Indicator Light9 begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
•
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded.
•
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The ESP system has 2 available operating modes.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD/4WD LOCK or 2WD Models
ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOCK
and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or
the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW
or neutral back to 4WD LOCK, the ESP system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most all driving
situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
This mode is entered by momentarily
depressing the “ESP OFF” Control
Switch. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine management portion of
ESP has been desensitized, the thresh-
olds for ESP activation are raised, and
the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be
illuminated. This mode is intended to
be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction. TSC (Trailer
Sway Control) is not available when the system is in the
9Partial Off9 mode. To turn ESP on again, momentarily
depress the “ESP-Control OFF” Control Switch. This will
restore the normal “ON” mode of operation. ESP always
operates under braking, even with the switch in the
OFF-position.
WARNING!
In the Partial Off mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
Partial Off
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
mode by pressing the ESP Control Switch. Once the
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESP on by momentarily depress-
ing the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done with the
vehicle is in motion.
4WD LOW Range
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW.
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the
transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOCK or
neutral to 4WD LOW, the ESP system will be in this
mode. In 4WD LOW, ESP function is desensitized until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h). At 30
mph (48 km/h) the normal ESP stability function returns
and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light” turns off. When the
vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h) the ESP
system goes back to Partial Off. ESP is desensitized at low
vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW so that it will not interfere
with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide
the stability feature at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
The ABS is in a special Off-Road mode that allows wheels
to lock at lower speeds if gravel is detected to shorten
stopping distances.
NOTE: When the vehicle is in 4WD LOW, a feature of
the ESP system remains active whether the ESP is on or
off. This feature functions similar to a limited slip differ-
ential and controls the wheel spin across an axle. If one
wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
In the Partial Off mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warn-
ing Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
TSC (Trailer Sway Control)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to
stop the sway. The system will reduce engine power and
apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of
the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once the
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-
quired. TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to 9Trailer Tow-
ing9 in section 5 of this manual for other information on
towing a trailer with your vehicle.
MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) — 5.7L
Engine Only
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
9....blank....9 = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure —
Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT
=
Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA
=
Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9
=
Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD
=
Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03
=
Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01
=
Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
5
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
Tire Placard Location
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the
outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread
life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
5
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
5
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension
components. You could lose control and have an
accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
5
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE
INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains on your vehicle, or other traction
aids that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could suggest chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after
driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of
the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your
truck.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on your
vehicle with P245/70R17 tires.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on 4x4 trucks equipped with
tires other than P245/70R17 tires. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking
structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do not use
tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of your vehicle.
There may not be adequate clearance for the chains
and you are risking structural or body damage to
your vehicle.
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is lo-
cated on the drivers side B-pillar).
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
3 hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to
the “Tires – General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
warning threshold for any reason, including low tem-
perature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPM warning lamp to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the TPM warning
lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 33 (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured
tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-
mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently
low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring
lamp. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire
Pressure Monitoring lamp will still be ON. In this situa-
tion, the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will turn OFF
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
lamp.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Base System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of
the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
by any of the following scenarios: 1) Jamming due to
electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the
same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2) Installing
some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects
radio wave signals. 3) Lots of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings. 4) Using tire chains on the
vehicle. 5) Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due
to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module.
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
•
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells).
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
•
Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and
inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic display
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display
of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPM System Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM” message for 3 seconds. This text message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “- - -“ in place of the
pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following scenarios: 1) Jamming due
to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting
the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2)
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
affects radio wave signals. 3) Lots of snow or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings. 4) Using tire chains on the
vehicle. 5) Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage for 3 seconds and then display dashes (- - -) in place
of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The EVIC will
display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message for 3 sec-
onds, and then display dashes (- - -) in place of a pressure
value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- - -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
5
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines (except 5.7L engines) are de-
signed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality un-
leaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-
tane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions,
the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit
over high quality regular gasolines, and in some circum-
stances may result in poorer performance.
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s world wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
NOTE: 4.7L Engine — If Equipped , is now rated for
E85 Ethanol use. Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler
door label can operate on E-85. For more information,
refer to “Flexible Fuel” in this section.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85
Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol,
it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more
important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using
leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the
emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunc-
tions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you
notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your
engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require
immediate service. Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle
when the humidity is low and the temperature is high, use a
premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock. If spark
knock persists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage may
result.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane
enhancers is not recommended. Many of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage
or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
5
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the
precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monox-
ide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run
the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit
in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an ex-
tended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area
with the engine running for more than a short period,
adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance.
Have theexhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly.
Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust
gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use
with this vehicle.
NOTE: To avoid contact between fuel cap and paint,
hang tether strap over hook provided on inner fuel door.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and will cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas
cap until a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
WARNING!
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the
tank filled.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
5
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler cap (gas cap)
can operate on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
E-85 Badge
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling
•
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F,
you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow-
ing start up even if the above recommendations are
followed.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in Mopart engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
DaimlerChrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufac-
turer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified
and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-
6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, devel-
oped during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional
protection to DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines. Use
Mopart or an equivalent oil meeting the specification
MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F (-18 C). In the
range of 0 F (-18 C) to 32 F (0 C), you may experience an
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
5
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)
and your driving range to decrease by about 30% com-
pared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Sched-
ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and shows the Month, Day, and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure (Cold)
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met.
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Aloaded vehicle is shown in the following example. Note
that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten service life.
NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not the
weights for your vehicle. Also, the amount of load
added to both the front and rear axles can be computed
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5
after the vehicle has been weighed both in its (curb
weight( condition, and in its (loaded and ready for
operation( condition.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
5
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
TSC (Trailer Sway Control) – If Equipped
•
Trailer Sway Control – Electronic
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to
stop the sway. The system will reduce engine power and
apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of
the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once the
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-
quired. TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Even if your vehicle is
equipped with electronic trailer sway control, mechanical
sway control is recommended when appropriate for the
size of your trailer.
•
Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
5
Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
Aspecial high platform with a coupling that mounts over
the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects
a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000
lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to
the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
See your dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
5
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
•
http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
•
http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada).
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
5
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the
transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.
Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
5
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may includea4and7pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
4 - Pin Connector
7- Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
5
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW
HAUL” feature should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “TOW HAUL” feature while operat-
ing the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See the Maintenance
Schedule in section 8 of this manual for transmission
fluid change intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the “TOW HAUL” feature ON when driving in
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
more severe grades.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
−
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
SNOWPLOW
NOTE: Do not use this vehicle for snowplow applica-
tions.
WARNING!
Snowplows, winches, and other aftermarket equip-
ment should not be added to the front end or your
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by
the change in the front end structure. The airbags
could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy
during a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
5
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in an acci-
dent. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as
described earlier in this manual
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational Towing 2WD Models
Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable.
Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can
cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the drive-
shaft for towing is not recommended since this allows
transmission fluid to leak out.
Recreational Towing 4WD Models
CAUTION!
Vehicles equipped with an NV 140 Transfer Case
(which has no neutral position) may NOT be used for
recreational towing.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
despite the transmission position. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
NOTE: The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be
shifted into Neutral (N) for recreational towing. The
Neutral (N) selection button is located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and
out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
Shifting into Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
5
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without
starting the engine.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N).
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
4 seconds.
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light
comes on release Neutral (N) button.
8. Start engine.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
12. Turn ignition key to the unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses
and the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements (with the exception of3-Key
ON) are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N)
button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer,
then the Neutral (N) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral
(N) button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case
in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the
transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P)
Shifting OUT of Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without
starting the engine.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N).
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
1 second.
7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
the Neutral (N) button.
8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).
10. Start the engine.
11. Shift automatic transmission into Drive (D).
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to depress-
ing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
5
the 1 second time, then all of the position indicator lights
will flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the Neutral (N) button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not On, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
internal parts.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
inner surface.
The following information about your vehicle is dis-
played on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
with descriptions of all production and special equip-
ment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
NOTE: Always refer to the equipment identification
plate when ordering parts.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher ..................366
m Jacking And Tire Changing ................367
▫ Jack Location ........................367
m Jacking Instructions .....................368
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ................368
▫ Tire Changing Procedure ................370
m Jump Starting Procedures .................375
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..................377
m Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ........377
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle ................378
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles ...............379
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles ...............379
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column,
just behind the steering wheel. Press the flasher switch
and all front and rear directional signals will flash
intermittently.
Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor jack and tire changing tools are stowed under
the second row seat.
The jack is secured in place with a winged stud and a
fixed stud. It is very important to secure the jack tightly
in place by engaging the slot in the base to the fixed stud
under the middle seat. The winged stud inserts through
the eyelet in the end of the jack’s worm screw.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367
6
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Removing The Spare Tire
The spare tire on your vehicle is located underneath the
vehicle in the rear.
368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
1. Remove the rubber plug from the floor in the cargo
area.
2. Engage the jack wrench extension to the spare tire
winch through the hole in the floor.
3. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
tire. Continue to turn the wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the vehicle.
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can dam-
age the winch.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369
6
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor
jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle
only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for
service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Preparations
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transmission). On Four
Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L”
position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame
(prior to inboard transition. Operate the jack using the
jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube exten-
sion, may be used but is not required.
Front Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371
6
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to
the tire as posssible with the drive tubes extending to the
rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
Rear Left Jacking Location
Rear Right Jacking Location
372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ± 10 ft.
lbs. (183 ± 14 N·m) dynamic torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
7. Remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or alu-
minum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may
result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373
6
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem
facing the ground.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn
into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue
to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click
2 times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire
several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contami-
nated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
•
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12 volts.
Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or
bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if equipped),
DO NOT jump-start the battery.
If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot,
proceed as follows:
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watch bands or bracelets which might make an
unintended electrical contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition
OFF on both vehicles.
3. Turn OFF heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375
6
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could
cause the battery to explode.
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because the
battery could rupture or explode. The battery tem-
perature must be brought up above freezing point
before attempting jump start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE,
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.
This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377
6
WARNING!
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles
under tow must be observed.
378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF
position along with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30
mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15
miles (25 km).
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km )
or faster than 30 mph, it must be towed on a flatbed, or
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground, or with the front end raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, with the rear wheels on the
ground, at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than
15 miles (25 km ) can cause severe transmission damage.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Engine Compartment 3.7L V6 ..............384
m Engine Compartment 4.7L V-8 ..............385
m Engine Compartment 5.7L HEMI V-8 .........386
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ........387
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............388
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................388
m Replacement Parts ......................390
m Dealer Service .........................390
m Maintenance Procedures ..................391
▫ Engine Oil ..........................391
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................394
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . .394
▫ Spark Plugs .........................395
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................395
▫ Engine Fuel Filter .....................396
▫ Catalytic Converter ....................396
▫ Maintenance Free Battery ................397
7
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............399
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............399
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints ..............400
▫ Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints ........401
▫ Body Lubrication .....................401
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................401
▫ Windshield And Rear Window Washers .....402
▫ Exhaust System ......................402
▫ Cooling System .......................403
▫ Emission Related Components ............409
▫ Brake System ........................410
▫ Automatic Transmission ................411
▫ Transfer Case ........................414
▫ Axles ..............................414
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................415
m Fuse Block ............................420
▫ Fuses (Interior) .......................421
▫ Fuses (Power Distribution Center) .........424
▫ Fuses (Integrated Power Module) ..........427
m Vehicle Storage ........................429
m Replacement Light Bulbs .................430
m Bulb Replacement ......................430
▫ Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal ..........430
▫ Rear Side Marker, Tail Lights, Turn Signals
And Backup Lights — Replacement ........432
▫ License Lights ........................436
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.7L V6
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.7L V-8
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.7L HEMI V-8
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
•
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
7
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improp-
erly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the
gas cap until a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press
the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem persists, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap.
If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system is determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine. If you crank or start the engine, you
will have to start this test over.
3. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec-
onds and then remain on until the first engine crank or
the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the
first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means
that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready you should see your
dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
7
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
7
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended en-
gine oil and filter change intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
4x4 Models, If Used Primarily For Off-Road Operation
Every 50 hours of use.
Dusty Conditions
Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these
conditions, special attention should be given to the
engine air cleaner and the crankcase inlet air cleaner. The
crankcase ventilation system should also be checked
periodically. Make sure that these units are always clean.
This will tend to reduce to a minimum the amount of
abrasive material that may enter the engine.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low tempera-
ture starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil
filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil
viscosity for your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to “Multi Displacement System” under “Starting
and Operating” for more details.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
7
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopart Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if re-
quired. See your authorized dealer for service. At the
mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all belts
and tensioner should be checked for condition. Improper
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure. Belts
should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing,
or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of
damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator
belt tension can cause battery failure. Also check belt
routing to make sure there is no interference between the
belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine
performance and emission control. The plugs installed in
your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal
service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance
Chart. New plugs should be installed at this mileage. The
entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction
due to a faulty spark plug. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for the proper type of spark plug for
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended en-
gine air cleaner filter change intervals.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
7
Engine Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance Free Battery
The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
7
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.9
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
7
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oils and Refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons. Damaged seals
should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination
of the grease.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints
All four wheel drive models are equipped with four
constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these
joints is not required. However, the joint boot should be
inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If
external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and
grease should be replaced immediately. Continued op-
eration could result in failure of the joint due to water
and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require
complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors,liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
7
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield and Rear Window Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser and
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
7
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
fied coolant as soon as possible.
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant. When
adding coolant:
•
The manufacturer recommends using Mopart
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology)
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are
anticipated.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
7
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
7
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Emission Related Components
Fuel System Hoses And Vapor/Vacuum Harnesses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular
attention should be given to examining hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust mani-
fold.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
NOTE: Fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to
ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil
wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an
indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid when
systems are under pressure (during vehicle operation),
should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage.
You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified
hoses and clamps, or their equivalent in material and
specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is manda-
tory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or
removed during service. Care should be taken in install-
ing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve
Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system
requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug-
ging because of deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the
PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage. Have
the PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper
operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is
plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve – Do not
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
7
attempt to clean the PCV valve! Check ventilating hose
for indication of damage or plugging with deposits.
Replace if necessary.
Brake System
Power Disc Brakes (Front and Rear)
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
Brake Master Cylinders
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check system for leaks.
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
WARNING!
Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified, as to specifications
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching on fire.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Brake Hoses
Inspection should be performed whenever the brake
system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!
Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
possible burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any sign of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
NOTE: If equipped with a dipstick, use the following
procedure. If your vehicle has a capped dipstick, it is
sealed and should not be tampered with. Your authorized
dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level
is set properly.
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180°F (82°C). This occurs after at
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
7
least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (Park).
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F ( 21°C) (room
temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F ( 82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change
Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended
transmission fluid and filter change intervals.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid; refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
7
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Transfer Case
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the
transfer case serviced immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle
with low transfer case fluid.
Drain And Refill
Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended
transfer case fluid change intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Axles
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Drain And Refill
Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended axle
fluid change intervals.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Rear Axle
Rear Axle fluid levels should be 7/8 in. (22mm) +/- 1/4
in. (6 mm) below the fill hole for 8 1/4 in., and 9 1/4 in.
axles should be 1 5/8 in (31mm) +/- 1/4 in. (6 mm)
Front Axle
Front Axle fluid level should be 3/4 in. (20 mm) +/- 1/4
in. (6 mm) below the level of the fill hole.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
7
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
•
Use Mopart auto polish to remove road film and
stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
ity of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopart touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use Mopart Wheel Cleaner or select a non-
abrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads,
steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mo-
part cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply Mopart Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
7
•
For grease stains, apply Mopart Multi-purpose
cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a
fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials products.
Interior Care
Use Mopart Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Use Mopart Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and
trim.
Mopart Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopart Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
ments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. Amild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
7
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSE BLOCK
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
NOTE: If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for
longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect
your battery. You may do this by disconnecting the
battery or by disconnecting the two ignition-off draw
(I.O.D.) fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution
Center (PDC) located in the engine compartment. The
I.O.D. cavities include a snap-in retainer that allows the
fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the
fuse block. Pressing the I.O.D. fuse back into the cavity
reconnects it.
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuses (Interior)
The fuse block contains blade-type mini-fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers for high-current circuits. It is located
in the left kick panel. It is accessible through a snap-in
cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
7
Cavity Mini Fuse/Color Description
F1 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Clus-
ter Battery Feed
F 2 10 Amp Red Spare
F3 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run/
Start for Next
Generation Con-
troller (NGC),
Integrated
Power Module
(IPM), AC Relay
and Fuel Pump
Relay
F4 10 Amp Red
Door Node and
Non-Memory
Power Mirror
Switch Battery
Feed
Cavity Mini Fuse/Color Description
F5 (2) 10 Amp Red
Airbags
(2 Fuses in Yel-
low Holder)
F6 2 Amp Clear
Ignition Run/
Start Unlock
F7 25 Amp Natural
Radio Battery
Feed
F8 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run/
Start for
Cluster/Transfer
Case/Seat Sw.
Back lighting
F9 10 Amp Red
Satellite Digital
Audio Receiver
(SDAR)/Digital
Video Disc
(DVD) Battery
Feed
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse/Color Description
F10 10 Amp Red Spare
F11 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F12 20 Amp Yellow
Cluster Battery
Feed
F13 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run
HVAC Module/
Heated Rear
Glass (EBL) Re-
lay
F14 10 Amp Red
ABS Module Ig-
nition Run
F15 15 Amp Blue
Battery Feed
Blue Tooth,
Compass/Trip
Computer
(CMTC), Sentry
Key Diagnostics
Cavity Mini Fuse/Color Description
F16 20 Amp Yellow
Reconfigurable
Power Outlets
F17 20 Amp Yellow
Ignition Run /
Rear Park Assist
/ Second Row
Heated Seats
F18 20 Amp Yellow
Cigar Lighter
Ignition
F19 10 Amp Red Spare Fuse
F20 15 Amp Blue
Heating & Air
Conditioning
w/ATC Only
Battery Feed
F21 25 Amp Natural
Amplifier Bat-
tery Feed
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
7
Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri-
bution center located in the left side of the engine
compartment.
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and
relays. A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number
of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corre-
sponds to the following chart. These fuses and relays can
be obtained from your dealer.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 30 Amp
Pink
Starter
2 30 Amp
Pink
Front Wiper
3 40 Amp
Green
Brake Batt
4 30 Amp
Pink
JB Feed Acc # 2
5 40 Amp
Green
Power Seats
6 30 Amp
Pink
Run Remote Relay
Feed
Power Distribution Center
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
7 40 Amp
Green
Blower Motor Relay
Feed
8 40 Amp
Green
JB Feed Acc Delay
9 Spare
10 30 Amp
Pink
ASD
11 40 Amp
Green
Power Liftgate ( If
Equipped)
12 40 Amp
Green
JB Feed / Heated
Rear Glass (EBL)/ T
Case Brake
13 30 Amp
Pink
JB Feed RR
14 40 Amp
Green
ESP Pump
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
15 50 Amp
Red
JB Feed
16 10 Amp
Red
Spare
17 Spare
18 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
19 20 Amp
Yellow
Next Generation
Controller (NGC)
20 25 Amp
Clear
115v Power Inverter
21 20 Amp
Yellow
ABS Batt
22 20 Amp
Yellow
Next Generation
Controller (NGC)
Batt
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
23 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow
24 15 Amp
Blue
A/C Clutch
25 15 Amp
Blue
Stop Lamp Switch
26 Spare
27 20 Amp
Yellow
Run/Start Relay
Feed
28 Spare
29 Relay Run Start
30 Relay Run Remote
31 Spare
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
32 Relay Starter
33 Relay Electronic Auto-
matic Transaxle
(EATX)
34 Relay AC Clutch
35 Relay Fuel Pump Rly
36 Spare
37 Relay Stop Lamp Switch
38 Spare
39 Relay Blower Motor
40 Relay Auto Shut Down
(ASD) Rly
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuses (Integrated Power Module)
An integrated Power Module is located in the left side of
the engine compartment. This center contains cartridge
fuses, mini fuses and relays. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside cover
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 Relay Wiper On/Off Rly
2 Relay Wiper Hi/Lo Rly
3 Relay Horn Rly
4 Relay Rear Wiper Rly
5 Relay Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn Rly
6 Relay Rt Trailer-Tow
Stop/Turn Rly
7 Relay Park Lamps Rly
8 10 Amp
Red
Lt Park Lamps
9 10 Amp
Red
Trailer-Tow Park
Lamps
Integrated Power Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
10 10 Amp
Red
Rt Park Lamps
11 Relay Radiator Fan Hi Rly
12 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Mod-
ule (FCM) Batt #4
13 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Mod-
ule (FCM) Batt #2
14 20 Amp
Yellow
Adjustable Pedal
15 20 Amp
Yellow
Ft Fog Lamps
16 20 Amp
Yellow
Horn
17 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Wiper
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
18 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Mod-
ule (FCM) Batt #1
19 20 Amp
Yellow
Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
20 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Mod-
ule (FCM) Batt #3
21 20 Amp
Yellow
Rt Trailer-Tow
Stop/Turn
22 30 Amp
Pink
Front Control Mod-
ule (FCM) BATT # 5
23 40 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan
24 Relay Radiator Fan Lo Rly
25 Relay Ft Fog Lamps Rly
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini
Fuse
Description
26 Relay Adjustable Pedal
Rly
27 30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #1
28 30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2
29 Spare
30 Spare
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The
I.O.D. cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the
fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the
fuse block.
•
The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode
and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cable from the battery.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
7
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Dome Light ....................NotServiceable
Liftgate Lamp ...........................567
Overhead Console Lights...........NotServiceable
Reading Light...................NotServiceable
Visor Vanity Lights ...............NotServiceable
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb No.
Headlight .............................H13
Front Park/Turn ......................3457AK
Back-Up ..............................3057
Center High Mounted Stoplight ..............921
Front Side Marker ........................168
Fog Lamp ...........................9006LL
License Plate Light .......................168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal and Side Marker ....3057
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal
1. Remove the two bolts attaching the headlight to the
upper fender reinforcement (hood must be open to access
bolts).
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove one nut that attaches the headlight to the
inner fender panel. Access to the nut is possible by
opening the fender panel access door which is located in
the wheel liner.
3. Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the
headlight from the fender panel.
4. While firmly holding the headlight in your hands
disconnect all connectors by following the procedure
described in step number 5 below.
5. Remove the bulb connector from the headlight making
sure to pull and release the red tab on all connectors.
Loosen the connector by pressing down on the black
and/or green release which is located below or above the
red tab. The green release is located above the red tab on
the H13, the black release is located above the 3457AK
red tab.
6. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
7. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
NOTE: These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat build-up which reduces bulb
life.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
7
Rear Side Marker, Tail Lights, Turn Signals And
Backup Lights — Replacement
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the light to the outboard side of the vehicle and
remove.
3. Unlock and remove electrical connector.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
7
4. Remove the three screws holding the bulb strip to the
back of the tail lamp.
5. Remove the bulb strip from the tail light lens.
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove bulbs from bulb strip by pulling the bulb
straight out.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
7
License Lights
1. Remove the two screws securing the lens to the
liftgate.
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull bulb from socket.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stoplight
1. Remove two screws securing stoplight housing assem-
bly to the liftgate.
2. Turn socket 1/4 counterclockwise and free from hous-
ing.
3. Pull bulb straight from socket to remove.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
7
Fog Lights
To replace the left foglamp bulb:
1. Remove the three wheel liner screws.
2. Remove the remove the far left air dam screw at the
bottom of the fascia.
3. Peel back the liner and access the foglamp.
4. Rotate the socket and connector 1/4 turn counter-
clockwise and pull straight reward to disengage from the
lamp.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket and replace.
The right foglamp can be accessed from below the
vehicle. Follow the previous steps 4 and 5 of the left
foglamp to replace the bulb.
NOTE: These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat build-up, which reduces bulb
life.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel
3.7L/4.7L, 87 Octane 27 Gal. 102L
5.7L, 89 Octane 27 Gal 102L
Engine Oil (with filter)
3.7L, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 5 Qt. 4.7L
4.7L, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 6 Qt. 5.7L
5.7L, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 7 Qt. 6.6L
Cooling System (includes 2.1 Qts./2L for coolant bottle
3.7L without Rear Heat (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 13.5 Qt. 12.9L
3.7L with Rear Heat (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 14.5 Qt. 13.8L
4.7L without Rear Heat (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 13.1 Qt. 12.5L
4.7L with Rear Heat (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 14.2 Qt. 13.5L
5.7L without Rear Heat (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) NA NA
5.7L with Rear Heat (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 16.6 Qt. 15.8L
NOTE: All fluid capacities are approximate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology)
3.7/4.7L/5.7L Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter Mopart Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine) REC14MCC4 (Gap 0.043”)
Spark Plugs (4.7L Engine) Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039”) Lower Bank — FR8T1332 (Gap 0.051”)
Spark Plugs (3.7L Engine) ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043”)
Fuel Selection 3.7L/4.7L 87 Octane
Fuel Selection 5.7L 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopart DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type on the following pages must be done at the times or
mileages specified to assure the continued proper func-
tioning of the emission control system. These, and all
other maintenance services included in this manual,
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and
reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for
vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message
after completing the scheduled oil change. If this sched-
uled oil change is performed by someone other than your
dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Oil Change Required” in “System
Status (EVIC Displays)” of the EVIC section in this
manual or under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the
“Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
•
Check the Manual Transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with sixteen spark plugs, one set is located on
the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
located on the side of the engine.
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug and must be change every 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug and must be changed every 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6
Rotate Tires. 6,000 10 000 6
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty
or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, replace if necessary.
12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using
your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing.
18,000 30 000 18
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
24,000 40 000 24
Inspect Exhaust System. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
24,000 40 000 24
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, replace if necessary.
24,000 40 000 24
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30
Inspect the transfer case fluid. 30,000 50 000 30
Replace the top row of spark plugs on 4.7L engines.
**
30,000 50 000 30
Replace the spark plugs on 3.7L and 5.7L engines. 30,000 50 000 30
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and
change main sump filter (4.7L/5.7L engines only). This
applies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
60,000 100 000 60
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid, change
filter (3.7L engines). This applies only if your vehicle
is used for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
60,000 100 000 60
Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or fre-
quent trailer towing.
60,000 100 000 60
448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow-
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or
more then 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90F° (32C°).
60,000 100 000 60
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 90,000 150 000 90
Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60
Replace the ignition cables on 4.7L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Replace the side row of spark plugs on 4.7L engines.
**
102,000 170 000 102
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid, change
filter (3.7L engines).
120,000 200 000 120
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and
change main sump filter and spin-on cooler return
filter (if equipped)(4.7L/5.7L engines only).
120,000 200 000 120
Replace Accessory Drive Belt(s). 120,000 200 000 120
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle ..............................452
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............452
▫ Prepare A List ........................452
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............452
m If You Need Assistance ...................452
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .....455
m Mopart Parts .........................455
m Reporting Safety Defects ..................456
▫ In Canada ..........................456
m Publication Order Forms ..................457
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................458
▫ Treadwear ..........................458
▫ Traction Grades ......................458
▫ Temperature Grades ...................459
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Dealership name
•
Vehicle identification number
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453
9
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 455
9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing-
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457
9
Call Toll Free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
•
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459
9
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............195,291
Adding Fuel ...........................336
Adjustable Pedals .......................148
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 395
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............252,399
Air Conditioning ........................251
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............263
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ................255
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............399,400
Air Conditioning System ................251,399
Air Filter .....................384,385,386,395
Air Pressure, Tires ....................314,322
Airbag .............................53,203
Airbag Light ..........................61,76
Alarm, Panic ............................24
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................18,195
Alignment and Balance ...................321
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............8
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................248
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........404,405,439
Disposal ............................407
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............291,295
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................195
Anti-Theft System .....................18,195
Appearance Care ........................415
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) .........19
Audio Systems (Radio) .................206,236
Auto Unlock, Doors ......................162
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............83,87
Automatic Door Locks ..................30,162
Automatic Headlights ....................140
Automatic Transaxle ....................12,276
Automatic Transmission .............273,276,411
Adding Fluid .........................412
Fluid and Filter Changes .................413
Fluid Level Check ......................411
Fluid Type ...........................441
Gear Ranges ..........................276
462 INDEX
Special Additives ......................413
Torque Converter ......................280
Axle Fluid .............................441
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............414
Ball Joints .............................400
Battery .......................384,385,386,397
Charging ............................375
Emergency Starting .....................375
Gas Caution ..........................375
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......26
Saving Feature (Protection) ...............139
Belts, Drive ............................394
Belts, Seat ..............................40
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............401
B-Pillar Location ........................309
Brake Assist System ......................296
Brake Control System, Electronic .............295
Brake Fluid ............................441
Brake System ........................291,410
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................291,295
Disc Brakes ..........................410
Fluid Check ..........................410
Hoses ..............................411
Master Cylinder .......................410
Parking .............................290
Warning Light .....................195,199
Brakes ...............................291
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............276
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........74
Bulb Replacement .......................430
Bulbs, Light ............................430
Calibration, Compass .....................166
Camera, Rear ...........................156
Capacities, Fluid ........................439
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................336
INDEX 463
10
Oil (Engine) ..........................393
Power Steering ........................399
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............406
Car Washes ............................416
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............75,336
Cargo Management System .................185
Cargo Organizer .......................185
Cargo Organizer ........................185
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................343
Catalytic Converter ......................396
CD (Compact Disc) Player ...............206,236
Cellular Phone ..................87,236,237,251
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............437
Certification Label .......................343
Charging ..............................375
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................306
Child Restraint ........................64,65
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............68,73
Child Seat ..............................70
Circuit Breakers .........................420
Cleaning
Wheels .............................417
Climate Control .........................251
Climate Control, Rear Zone ..............255,261
Clock .....................204,207,210,222,237
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............250
Compact Spare Tire ......................317
Compass Calibration .....................166
Compass Variance .......................167
Connector
UCI ................................240
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........240
Console, Floor .......................181,182
Console, Overhead ....................158,159
Contract, Service ........................454
Coolant Pressure Cap
(Radiator Cap) .................384,385,386,406
Cooling System .........................403
464 INDEX
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............405
Coolant Capacity ......................439
Coolant Level ......................403,407
Disposal of Used Coolant ................407
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................404
Inspection ...........................407
Points to Remember ....................407
Pressure Cap .........................406
Radiator Cap .........................406
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......404,439,440
Temperature Gauge .....................193
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............149
Cup Holder ............................181
Customer Assistance .....................452
Data Recorder, Event ......................62
Daytime Running Lights ...................141
Dealer Service ..........................390
Defroster, Rear Window ...................267
Defroster, Windshield .............76,254,259,260
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................144
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................387
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player ..........206,236
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................194
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission .................411
Oil (Engine) ..........................391
Power Steering ........................399
Disarming, Theft System ...................19
Disc Brakes ............................410
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............407
Door Locks .............................28
Door Locks, Automatic ....................162
Door Opener, Garage .....................168
Drive Belts ............................394
Drive Shaft Universal Joints ................401
INDEX 465
10
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ..............................288
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ......244
E-85 Fuel .............................339
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................85
Electrical Power Outlets ...................177
Electronic Brake Control System .............295
Anti-Lock Brake System .................295
Brake Assist System ....................296
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................298
Electronic Stability Program ...............299
Traction Control System .................298
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .............298
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......149
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) .........200,299
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) .............................156,159
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...............377
Jacking .............................370
Tow Hooks ..........................377
Towing .............................378
Emission Control System Maintenance .........444
Emission Related Components ..............409
Engine
Air Cleaner ..........................395
Block Heater .........................276
Break-In Recommendations ................74
Compartment ......................385,386
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................440
Exhaust Gas Caution ................39,75,336
Fails to Start ..........................274
Flooded, Starting ......................274
Fuel Requirements .....................439
Jump Starting .........................375
Multi-Displacement .....................304
466 INDEX
Oil ...........................391,439,440
Oil Filler Cap .................384,385,386,393
Oil Selection .......................393,439
Oil Synthetic .........................394
Starting .............................273
Temperature Gauge .....................193
Entry System, Illuminated ..................20
Equipment Identification Plate ..............364
Event Data Recorder ......................62
Exhaust Gas Caution ..............39,75,336,403
Exhaust System .......................75,402
Extender, Seat Belt ........................52
Exterior Lighting ........................140
Fabric Care ............................417
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................395
Engine Fuel ..........................396
Engine Oil ........................394,440
Engine Oil Disposal ....................394
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................366
Turn Signal .....................142,193,432
Flat Tire Stowage .....................368,374
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ........................342
Engine Oil ...........................341
Fuel Requirements ..................339,340
Maintenance ..........................342
Replacement Parts .....................342
Starting .............................341
Flooded Engine Starting ...................274
Floor Console .......................181,182
Fluid, Brake .........................410,441
Fluid Capacities .........................439
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................411
Brake ...............................410
INDEX 467
10
Engine Oil ...........................391
Power Steering ........................399
Transfer Case .........................414
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........440
Fog Lights ..........................141,438
Folding Rear Seat .....................123,126
Four Wheel Drive .......................281
Operation ...........................281
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ..................366
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................377
Front Axle (Differential) ...................415
Fuel .................................332
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................336,338
Filter ...............................396
Gauge ..............................193
Octane Rating ......................332,440
Requirements ......................332,439
Tank Capacity ........................439
Fuel, Flexible .............See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution .....................338
Fuses .....................180,420,421,424,427
Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) ...........168
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............336,338,388
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ...................193
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................332
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................333
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ....................193
Fuel ................................193
Odometer .........................196,198
Speedometer .........................195
Tachometer ..........................196
Gear Ranges ...........................276
General Information .................16,114,332
Glass Cleaning ..........................419
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............344,347
Gross Cargo Weight ......................343
468 INDEX
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................346
GVWR ............................343,346
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ........87,236,237
Hard Drive (HDD) ....................206,236
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................288
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................366
Headlights ............................430
Cleaning ............................418
Delay ..............................139
High Beam ...........................143
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........143
Lights On Reminder ....................141
Passing .............................143
Replacing ............................430
Heated Mirrors ..........................87
Heated Seats ...........................118
Heater ...............................251
Heater, Engine Block .....................276
High Beam Indicator .....................194
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 143
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................351
HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 168
Hood Release ..........................135
Hoses ................................409
Ignition .............................12,17
Key.................................12
Lock ................................17
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................13
Infant Restraint ........................64,65
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................322
Information Center ......................159
INDEX 469
10
Information Center, Vehicle .................159
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................83
Instrument Cluster .......................193
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............191
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............419
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............427
Interior Appearance Care ..................418
Interior Fuses ..........................421
Interior Lighting ........................138
Interior Lights ..........................138
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........144
Introduction .............................4
Inverter Outlet (115V) .....................177
Jack Location ...........................367
Jack Operation .......................367,370
Jacking Instructions ......................371
Key, Programming ........................15
Key, Replacement ........................15
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................13
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................53
Lane Change and Turn Signals .........142,193,432
Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................40,46
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) .......68
Life of Tires ............................319
Liftgate ................................35
Lights ..............................77,137
Airbag ............................61,203
Anti-Lock Warning .....................195
Automatic Headlights ...................140
Back-Up .............................432
Brake Warning ........................199
Bulb Replacement ......................430
470 INDEX
Center Mounted Stop ...................437
Courtesy/Reading .....................158
Cruise ..............................203
Daytime Running ......................141
Dome ..............................159
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator .........................200,300
Fog ..........................141,198,438
Hazard Warning Flasher .................366
Headlights ...........................140
High Beam ...........................143
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............143
Instrument Cluster ..................140,193
Interior ..........................138,158
License .............................436
Lights On Reminder ....................141
Low Fuel .........................193,194
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........201
Park ...............................140
Passing .............................143
Reading .............................159
Seat Belt Reminder .....................194
Service ..............................430
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........201
Traction Control .......................300
Turn Signal ........................142,432
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....193
Loading Vehicle .........................343
Tires ...............................309
Locks .................................28
Automatic Door ........................30
Child Protection ........................32
Door ................................28
Ignition ..............................17
Keys ................................12
Power Door ...........................29
Steering Wheel .........................17
INDEX 471
10
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ..............................68
Lubrication, Body .......................401
Lug Nuts .............................373
Luggage Carrier .........................183
Lumbar Support ........................116
Maintenance Free Battery ..................397
Maintenance Procedures ...................391
Maintenance Schedule ....................444
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 201,388
Manual, Service .........................457
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection .....................441
Map/Reading Lights ..................158,159
Memory Seat ...........................131
Mirrors ................................83
Automatic Dimming ...................83,87
Electric Powered .......................85
Heated ..............................87
Memory .............................131
Outside ..............................84
Rearview .............................83
Vanity ...............................86
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............325
Mopar Parts .........................390,455
MP3 Player .........................206,236
Multi-Displacement Engine System ...........304
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............142
Navigation Radio ........................236
Navigation System ....................156,236
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................74
Occupant Restraints .......................39
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............332
Oil Change Indicator ..................162,197
472 INDEX
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................197
Oil, Engine .........................391,440
Capacity ............................439
Change Interval .......................392
Dipstick .............................391
Disposal ............................394
Filter ............................394,440
Filter Disposal ........................394
Identification Logo .....................393
Materials Added to .....................394
Recommendation ...................393,439
Synthetic ............................394
Viscosity ..........................393,439
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............387,388
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) ...........168
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................84
Overdrive ..........................196,279
Overdrive OFF Switch ....................279
Overhead Console ....................158,159
Overheating, Engine ......................194
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........457
Panic Alarm ............................24
Park Sense System, Rear ...................152
Parking Brake ..........................290
Parking On Hill .........................290
Passing Light ...........................143
Pedals, Adjustable .......................148
Personal Settings ........................162
Pets ..................................74
Pets, Transporting ........................74
Phone, Cellular ....................87,236,237
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) ........87,236,237
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........309
Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) .............206,236
USB .............................206,236
Positive Crankcase Valve ..................409
INDEX 473
10
Power
Brakes ..............................410
Distribution Center (Fuses) .......384,385,386,424
Door Locks .........................20,29
Lift Gate .............................36
Mirrors ..............................85
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........177
Steering ..........................294,399
Steering Filler Cap ................384,385,386
Sunroof .............................174
Windows .............................33
Power Steering Fluid .....................441
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............52
Preparation for Jacking ....................370
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................50
Programmable Electronic Features ............162
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Radial Ply Tires .........................316
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......404,406
Radio Broadcast Signals ...................205
Radio, Navigation .......................236
Radio Operation ...................206,237,251
Radio Remote Controls ....................249
Radio, Satellite ..............206,207,236,237,244
Radio (Sound Systems) .................206,236
Rear Axle (Differential) ....................415
Rear Camera ...........................156
Rear Cup Holder ........................182
Rear Liftgate ............................35
Rear Park Sense System ...................152
Rear Window Defroster ...................267
Rear Window Features ....................266
Rear Wiper/Washer ......................266
Rearview Mirrors ........................83
Reclining Front Seats .....................115
Recorder, Event Data ......................62
474 INDEX
Recreational Towing ......................360
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......361
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....363
Reformulated Gasoline ....................333
Refrigerant ............................400
Release, Hood ..........................135
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................50
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........249
Remote Starting System ....................27
Replacement Keys ........................15
Replacement Parts .......................390
Replacement Tires .......................320
Reporting Safety Defects ...................456
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........162,197
Restraints, Child .......................64,70
Restraints, Occupant ......................39
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................377
Roll Over Warning ........................4
Roof Type Carrier .......................183
Rotation, Tires ..........................324
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................76
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............77
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................456
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................39
Safety Information, Tire ...................305
Safety Tips .............................75
Satellite Radio ...............206,207,236,237,244
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................248
Schedule, Maintenance ....................444
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................419
Seat Belt Reminder .......................50
Seat Belts ..........................39,40,76
And Pregnant Women ...................52
Child Restraint .......................64,65
Extender .............................52
Front Seat ............................40
INDEX 475
10
Pretensioners ..........................50
Reminder ............................194
Seats .................................114
Adjustment ..........................114
Cleaning ............................417
Fold and Tumble Rear ................121,123
Heated ..............................118
Lumbar Support .......................116
Memory .............................131
Rear Folding .......................121,123
Reclining ............................115
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............18,195
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........404,440
Selection of Oil .........................393
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................13
Sentry Key Programming ...................15
Sentry Key Replacement ...................15
Service and Maintenance ................391,444
Service Assistance .......................452
Service Contract .........................454
Service Manuals ........................457
Setting the Clock .............204,207,210,222,237
Settings, Personal ........................162
Shifting
Automatic Transmission .................276
Transfer Case .........................281
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ..........................361
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ..........................363
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............45
Shoulder Belts ...........................40
Signals, Turn .....................142,193,432
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................322
Snow Plow ............................359
Snow Tires ............................323
Sound Systems (Radio) .................206,236
Spare Tire .............................317
476 INDEX
Spark Plugs ............................395
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............149
Speedometer ...........................195
Starting ...............................273
Automatic Transmission .................273
Emergency (Jump Starting) ...............375
Engine Block Heater ....................276
Engine Fails to Start ....................274
Remote ..............................27
Starting Procedures ......................273
Steering
Column Controls ......................142
Column Lock ..........................17
Power ...........................294,399
Wheel, Tilt ...........................147
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................249
Storage, Vehicle .........................429
Stuck, Freeing ..........................377
Sun Roof ..............................174
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information ........322
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................394
System, Navigation ......................236
System, Remote Starting ....................27
Tachometer ............................196
Taillights ..............................432
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........256
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..........193
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............68
Theft System Arming ......................19
Theft System Disarming ....................19
Tilt Steering Column .....................147
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......309,322
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............308
Tire Markings ..........................305
Tire Safety Information ....................305
INDEX 477
10
Tires ............................77,313,458
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................319
Air Pressure ..........................313
Alignment ...........................321
Chains ..............................322
Changing ............................368
Compact Spare ........................317
General Information ....................313
High Speed ..........................316
Inflation Pressures .....................314
Jacking .............................370
Life of Tires ..........................319
Load Capacity .....................309,310
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........325
Pressure Warning Light ..................201
Quality Grading .......................458
Radial ..............................316
Replacement .........................320
Rotation .............................324
Safety ...........................305,313
Sizes ...............................306
Snow Tires ...........................323
Spare Tire ...........................368
Spinning ............................318
Tread Wear Indicators ...................319
Wheel Mounting .......................370
Wheel Nut Torque .....................373
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............352
Torque Converter Clutch ..................280
Tow Hooks, Emergency ...................377
Towing ...............................346
Disabled Vehicle .......................378
Guide ..............................352
Recreational ..........................360
Weight ..............................352
Traction ..............................287
Traction Control ......................198,298
Trailer Towing ..........................346
478 INDEX
Cooling System Tips ....................359
Hitches .............................351
Minimum Requirements .................353
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................352
Wiring ..............................356
Trailer Towing Guide .....................352
Trailer Weight ..........................352
Transaxle .............................276
Automatic .........................12,276
Operation ...........................276
Transfer Case ...........................414
Fluid ...............................441
Transmission ........................276,411
Automatic ........................276,411
Filter ...............................413
Fluid ...............................441
Maintenance ..........................411
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry)
..26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt)
...168
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Tread Wear Indicators ....................319
Trip Odometer ..........................198
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................204
Turn Signals ......................142,193,432
UCI Connector .........................240
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ...........87,236
Underhood Fuses ........................424
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................458
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 240
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port ...........206,236
Universal Transmitter .....................168
USB Port ...........................206,236
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .................409
Vanity Mirrors ...........................86
Variance, Compass .......................167
INDEX 479
10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............7
Vehicle Information Center .................159
Vehicle Loading ......................310,343
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............8
Vehicle Storage .........................429
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................244
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............193
Warning, Roll Over ........................4
Warnings and Cautions .....................7
Warranty Information .....................455
Washer, Adding Fluid ...............384,385,386
Washers, Windshield .....................146
Washing Vehicle .........................416
Water
Driving Through ......................288
Weight Load Carrying ....................343
Wheel Alignment and Balance ...............321
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................417
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................417
Wheel Changing ........................368
Wheel Mounting ........................370
Wheel Nut Torque .......................373
Wind Buffeting .........................176
Window Fogging ........................264
Windows ..............................33
Power ...............................33
Windshield Defroster ..................254,259
Windshield Washers ................144,146,402
Fluid ....................144,384,385,386,402
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................401
Windshield Wipers .......................144
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................401
Wiper, Rear ............................266
Wipers, Intermittent ......................144
Wrecker Towing .........................378
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure ......417
480 INDEX
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION ROLLOVERWARNING HOW TO USETHIS MANUAL WARNINGSAND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS THINGS TOKNOW BEFORE STARTING YOURVEHICLE AWORD
ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key RemovalLocking Doors With The KeySENTRY KEY Replacement KeysCustomer Key ProgrammingGeneral InformationIGNITION AND STEERING LOCK Ignition Accessory Delay FeatureSECURITY ALARM SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED
ToSet the AlarmTo Disarm theSystemILLUMINATED ENTRY Vehicles Equipped WithPower Door LocksREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY To unlock the doorsand liftgateTo lock the doors and liftgateUsingthe Panic AlarmGeneralInformationProgramming Additional Transmitters
Battery ReplacementREMOTE STARTING SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED DOOR LOCKS Manual Door LocksPower Door LocksChild Protection Door LockWINDOWS Power Windows Auto DownAuto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection (Drivers and Front Passenger Door
Only)Window Lockout SwitchLIFTGATE Power Liftgate - If EquippedOCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsAdjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageSecond Row Center Seat BeltAutomatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode - If EquippedRear 60/40 Seat Third Row
Center Three Point Belt - If EquippedSeat Belt PretensionersEnhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) SeatBelts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderDriver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)-Airbags Event Data Recorder
(EDR)Child RestraintENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS SAFETYTIPS Exhaust SystemSafety Checks You Should Make Inside The VehicleSafety Checks You Should MakeOutside The VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OFYOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night MirrorAutomatic Dimming Mirror - If EquippedOutside MirrorsExterior Mirrors Folding Feature - If EquippedElectric Remote-Control MirrorsIlluminated Vanity Mirrors - If EquippedHeated Mirrors - If EquippedAutomatic Dimming Drivers Exterior Mirror - If
EquippedHANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) - IF EQUIPPED OperationPhone Call FeaturesUConnect System FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings You Should Know About Your UConnect SystemGeneral InformationSEATS Front Seat Manual Seat
AdjustmentFront Seats Manual Seat ReclinersManual Lumbar Support Adjustment - If EquippedAdjustable Head Restraints - All Seating Positions8 - Way Drivers Power Seat - If Equipped4 - Way Passengers Power Seat - If EquippedHeated Seats - If EquippedSecond
Row Bucket Seats - Fold and TumbleSecond Row 40/20/40 Seat - Fold and TumbleThird Row Seat Bench - If EquippedThird Row 60/40 Folding - If Equipped DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter to MemoryMemoryPosition RecallTo Disable ATransmitter Linked to MemorySelf-Limiting ControlDriver EasyExit and Easy Entry ControlTO OPENAND CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS Interior LightsBattery SaverHeadlight DelayAutomatic Headlights- If Equipped
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel LightsIlluminated EntryDaytime Running Lights (Canada Only)Lights-on ReminderFog Lights - If Equipped Multifunction Control LeverWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers Windshield WashersTILT STEERING
COLUMN DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS - IF EQUIPPED AdjustmentELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL - IF EQUIPPED To ActivateTo Set At A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary The Speed SettingTo Accelerate For PassingREAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED REAR CAMERA - IF EQUIPPED OVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading LightsOVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) - IF EQUIPPED Dome/Reading LightsElectronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) -If Equipped Compass/TemperatureButtonGARAGE DOOR OPENER -IF EQUIPPED ProgrammingHomeLinkGate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingUsing HomeLinkReprogramming aSingle HomeLink ButtonSecurityTroubleshooting TipsGeneral Information
POWER SUNROOF -IF EQUIPPED ExpressOpen FeatureWind BuffetingSunroofMaintenanceELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS115V Inverter Outlet -If EquippedElectrical OutletUse With Engine OFF(Battery Fed Configuration)FLOOR CONSOLE Floor ConsoleFeatures
Rear Floor Console Features - If EquippedFACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM-IF EQUIPPED INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Instrument Cluster INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK Clock Setting ProcedureRADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast SignalsTwo Types of SignalsElectrical DisturbancesAM ReceptionFM ReceptionSALES CODE REN - MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio (If Equipped)Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped)Clock Setting ProcedureSALES CODE RES - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio
ModeOperation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio PlayNotes On Playing MP3 FilesLIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)SALES CODE REQ - AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesLIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)SALES CODE
RER - MULTIMEDIASYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Satellite RadioOperating Instructions - Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped)Clock Setting ProcedureUNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) - IF EQUIPPED Connecting the iPod
Controlling the iPodusing Radio ButtonsPlay ModeListor Browse ModeVIDEOENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALESCODE XRV) - IFEQUIPPED SATELLITERADIO - IF EQUIPPED SystemActivationElectronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID)Selecting
Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK RadiosSelecting a ChannelStoring and Selecting Pre-Set ChannelsUsing the PTY (Program Type) Button - If EquippedPTY Button SCANPTY Button SEEKSatellite AntennaReception QualityREMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
- IF EQUIPPED Right-HandSwitch FunctionsLeft-Hand Switch Functionsfor Radio OperationLeft-Hand Switch Functionsfor Media (i.e. CD) OperationCOMPACTDISC MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULARPHONES CLIMATECONTROLS Manual Control
Air Conditioning OperationFront Blower ControlFront Mode ControlRear Temperature Control - If EquippedRear Window Defrosting and Rear Window Washer/WiperAutomatic Temperature Control (ATC) - If EquippedAutomatic ControlLevel Of Automatic ControlManual
Control (ATC)Rear Zone Climate Control - If Equipped Rear Rotary Temperature ControlFront Unit to Rear Unit ChartOperating TipsOperating Tips Chart REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper/Washer Rear Window DefrostingSTARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic TransmissionNormal StartingENGINE BLOCK HEATER - IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic TransmissionFOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NV 140 Transfer Case Operating Information/Precautions - If
EquippedNV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating Information / PrecautionsShifting Procedure- NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case DRIVING ON SLIPPERYSURFACES DRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing/Rising WaterShallow Standing WaterPARKING BRAKE
BRAKE SYSTEM Four-WheelAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)POWER STEERINGELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ABS (Anti-Lock BrakeSystem)BAS (Brake Assist System)TCS (Traction ControlSystem)ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)ESP (ElectronicStability
Program)MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L Engine Only TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresRadial-Ply Tires
Compact Spare Tire - If EquippedLimited Use Spare - If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife of TireReplacement TiresAlignment And BalanceSUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE
INFORMATION - IF EQUIPPED TIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) - IF EQUIPPED Base System - If EquippedPremium System - If EquippedGeneral InformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS
Reformulated GasolineGasoline/Oxygenate BlendsMMT InGasolineMaterials Added ToFuelFuel System CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsADDING FUELFuel Filler Cap (GasCap)Loose Fuel Filler Cap (GasCap) MessageFLEXIBLE FUEL - IF EQUIPPED E-85GeneralInformationETHANOL FUEL (E-85)Fuel RequirementsSelection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) and Gasoline VehiclesStartingCruising RangeReplacement PartsMaintenanceVEHICLE LOADING Certification LabelCurb WeightLoadingTRAILER TOWING
Common Towing DefinitionsTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer and Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsSNOWPLOW RECREATIONALTOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Recreational Towing 2WD
ModelsRecreational Towing 4WD ModelsEQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack LocationJACKING INSTRUCTIONS Removing The Spare TireTire Changing
ProcedureJUMP STARTING PROCEDURES FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS - IF EQUIPPED TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Four-Wheel Drive VehiclesTwo-Wheel Drive VehiclesMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.7L V6 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.7L V-8 ENGINE COMPARTMENT5.7L HEMI V-8 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -OBD II Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageEMISSIONSINSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS REPLACEMENTPARTS DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngine Oil FilterDrive Belts - Check Condition and TensionSpark PlugsEngine Air Cleaner FilterEngine Fuel FilterCatalytic ConverterMaintenance Free BatteryPower Steering - Fluid CheckAir Conditioner MaintenanceFront
Suspension Ball JointsDrive Shaft ConstantVelocity JointsBody LubricationWindshieldWiper BladesWindshield and Rear WindowWashersExhaust SystemCooling SystemEmission RelatedComponentsBrake SystemAutomatic TransmissionTransfer CaseAxlesAppearance
Care and Protectionfrom CorrosionFUSE BLOCK Fuses(Interior)Fuses (Power Distribution Center) Fuses (IntegratedPower Module) VEHICLESTORAGE REPLACEMENT LIGHTBULBS BULB REPLACEMENTHeadlights/Parking/Turn SignalRear SideMarker, TailLights,
Turn Signals And Backup Lights - ReplacementLicense LightsCenter High-Mounted StoplightFog Lights FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE RequiredMaintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEEDCONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOURVEHICLE Prepare For TheAppointmentPrepare A ListBe ReasonableWith RequestsIF YOU
NEED ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENTOF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction Grades
Temperature GradesINDEX
